670626
5
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/209
Next page
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / Cover_front_feynman.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Version 02.00.03
2
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO – More than just a telephone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / Intro.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO – More than just a telephone
Your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO is an IP phone designed for professional use.
u
Easy to set up
Use the automatic configuration via the Gigaset phone system or the default settings for
approx. 200 preconfigured VoIP providers.
u
Web user interfaces for configuration
Operate and configure your telephone from your PC with ease.
u
High Definition Sound Performance – HDSP
Make phone calls with brilliant sound quality.
u
Phone functions for the professional user
Use the call divert, conference call, automatic ringback, call reject and Do Not Disturb
(DND) functions.
u
Multiple directories
Manage your personal directory with up to 500 vCards (caller pictures are possible). Use an
LDAP online directory or online directories on the Internet.
u
Connection to a Gigaset T500 PRO or Gigaset T300 PRO Gigaset phone system
Connect your telephone to a Gigaset phone system and make use of a shared line with
colleagues and central management of your call lists or call switching, for example.
u
Network connection
Connect your telephone to the local network via Ethernet. Connect a PC using your tele-
phone as a gigabit Ethernet switch.
u
Protect the environment
Reduce environmental pollution with the energy-saving power adapter .
u
Individual settings
Load your own pictures and ringtones, subscribe to Internet services and choose how you
want the display to look.
Assign functions or frequently used numbers to the keys.
Further information on your phone can be found online at
www.gigaset.com/pro/gigasetDE700ippro
Enjoy your new phone!
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / overview.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
3
Phone overview
Phone overview
1 Mute key Activate/deactivate microphone (mute)
£
page 37
2 Speaker key Activate/deactivate speaker
£
page 37
3 Headset key Make call via headset
£
page 35
4 Volume key Depending on the operating mode: Adjust the volume of the
speaker, receiver, headset or ringer
£
page 36
5 Display keys Activate display functions
£
page 22
6 Information Centre Open the Information Centre
£
page 67
7 Do Not Disturb key Do Not Disturb (DND) function
£
page 37
8 Call records key Record a call
£
page 38
9 Message Centre Open call and message lists
£
page 67
10 End call/back key End/reject call; cancel function;
go back one menu level (press briefly);
return to idle status (press and hold)
£
page 26
£
page 24
11 Navigation key Scroll through lists and entries. In idle status:
£
page 24
È
Open redial list.
£
page 46
Confirm or start action, select entry
£
page 24
Z
Open directory
£
page 50
12 Consultation key Initiate/end consultation call
£
page 40
Understanding the keys
21 3 4 5
6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15
4
Phone overview
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / overview.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Understanding Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)
Understanding the display
Understanding the display symbols
13 Conference key Initiate conference call
£
page 41
14 Transfer key Transfer call to another party
£
page 42
15 Function keys Programmable keys
£
page 154
A
Flashes Incoming call.
£
page 35
Lights up Call is being made via the speaker.
£
page 37
B
Flashes Incoming call (a headset must be connected).
£
page 35
Lights up Call is being made via the headset.
£
page 35
C
Lights up The microphone is muted.
£
page 37
E
Flashes New message in the Message Centre.
£
page 67
F
Lights up Call is being recorded.
£
page 38
G
Lights up "Do Not Disturb" function is activated.
£
page 37
J
Lights up One or more callers on hold.
£
page 40
K
Lights up Conference call is activated.
£
page 41
S
Flashes Incoming call on the number programmed to this key.
£
page 33
Lights up Call is being made on the number programmed to this key.
ó
Ringer deactivated.
£
page 81
Ã
New messages on the network mailbox. The number
is displayed to the
right.
£
page 61
Missed calls.
£
page 46
Ë
New e-mails.
£
page 64
·
Alarm clock function activated. The wake-up time is displayed to the right.
£
page 70
Other icons may appear depending on the function. These are displayed alongside the corresponding
description.
Call Select Line
Current time
Area of application
Adjustable display, e.g.,
time zone, time, calen-
dar, picture
£
page 84
Display functions
(page 22)
T
T
T
Display icons
T
Display icons
Date and Time
U
U
You set the time and date
format using the Web
configurator
£
page 158.
Currently used
account
£
page 31
U
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingIVZ.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
5
Contents
Contents
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO – More than just a telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Phone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Understanding the keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Understanding Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Understanding the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Following safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Using the phone in different scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
First steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Check the package contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Setting up and connecting the device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting up the device (for the first time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Proceeding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Using the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Operating via the keypad and display menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Calling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Receiving incoming calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Ending a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Using functions when making a telephone call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Making a call to multiple participants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Setting up call divert (CD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using the call lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Viewing entries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Dialling a number from a list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Copying an entry from the call list to the directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Deleting an entry or list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Using directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using the local directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Using an LDAP directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Using online directories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Managing messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Voice mails on the network mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Call records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Managing e-mail messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Accessing messages via the Message Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
6
Contents
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingIVZ.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Managing the calendar and alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Managing the calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Displaying alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Missed alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Alarm clock function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using Internet services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Door interphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Closing info services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Operating door interphones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Displaying maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
On an incoming call or during a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
In the directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
As info service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Configuring basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the date and time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Setting the ringer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Activating/deactivating advisory tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Resetting the device to the default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Configuring settings for the local network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
LAN settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Connecting a headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Using the resource directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Managing screensavers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Managing caller pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Managing sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Checking the capacity of the Resource Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Starting the Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Understanding the Web configurator menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Running the setup assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Network and connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingIVZ.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
7
Contents
Checking the status of the phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Service (Customer Care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Questions and answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Protecting our environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Caring for your telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Contact with liquid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Authorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Using insert strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Using Gigaset QuickSync – additional functions for the PC interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Key combinations for phone system functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Information on license rights and copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
License texts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
8
Following safety precautions
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / security.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Following safety precautions
Warning
Be sure to read this user guide and the safety precautions before using your telephone.
Use only the power adapter indicated on the device.
Use only the cable supplied for LAN connection and connect it to the intended
ports only.
Using your telephone may affect nearby medical equipment. Be aware of the tech-
nical conditions in your particular environment, e.g. doctor's surgery.
If you use a medical device (e.g. a pacemaker), please contact the device manufac-
turer. They will be able to advise you regarding the susceptibility of the device to
external sources of high frequency energy (for the
specifications of your Gigaset product see "Technical Data").
The devices are not splashproof. For this reason do not install them in a damp envi-
ronment such as bathrooms or shower rooms.
Do not use the devices in environments with a potential explosion hazard
(e.g. paint shops).
If you give your Gigaset to a third party, make sure you also give them the user
guide.
Remove faulty devices from use or have them repaired by our Service team, as
these could interfere with other wireless services.
$
ƒ
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
9
Using the phone in different scenarios
Using the phone in different scenarios
Using your phone in a professional environment with phone system and server
structure
If you use your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO in a corporate network with a telephone infrastructure,
your phone incorporates functions and data from the phone system and servers.
In a corporate environment, the VoIP accounts and most of the settings are configured cen-
trally by the phone system.
§§1§§
Gigaset IP telephone
§§2§§
Gigaset IP telephone with integrated gigabit switch (Gigaset DE700 IP PRO).
Your PC is connected directly to the phone, providing you with an additional LAN connec-
tion in your network.
§§3§§
DECT base for connection to DECT handsets
§§4§§
Ethernet switch
Supports Quality of Service (QoS), Gigabit Ethernet and PoE (Power over Ethernet).
§§5§§
Phone system (e.g., Gigaset T500 PRO)
Forms Internet telephony, ISDN or S2M connections. Analogue devices can be connected.
A network connection is established using Ethernet.
§§6§§
Acts as a gateway to the Internet for the connected devices. Routes VoIP calls from the
phone system to the Internet.
DSL connection
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ISDN, S2M
10
Using the phone in different scenarios
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
7. File, e-mail and workgroup servers, or NAS systems, can be wirelessly integrated into the
phone system architecture. As a result:
Invitations to conference calls can be organised via the phone system
The phone system can be backed up to a server or the system can be started via the net-
work
Online directories (LDAP) can be managed centrally
Using your phone in a simplified environment without a phone system
You can also use your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO without a phone system.
§§1§§
Gigaset IP telephone with integrated gigabit switch (Gigaset DE700 IP PRO).
Your PC is connected directly to the phone, providing you with an additional LAN connec-
tion in your network.
§§2§§
Acts as a gateway to the Internet for the connected devices. Routes VoIP calls from the
phone to the Internet.
§§3§§
The SIP provider transfers calls from the Internet and establishes a connection with the
standard telephone network.
In this scenario, you must manually configure the VoIP accounts for your phone. You can cre-
ate up to 12 VoIP accounts on your phone.
Internet
Connection
ISDN,
S2M
SIP provider
1
3
2
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
11
First steps
First steps
Check the package contents
Telephone: Gigaset DE700 IP PRO
Receiver with cable for connection to the
phone
Ethernet cable for connection to the local
network (switch/router/gateway)
Power adapter for connecting the phone to
the mains power supply (if required)
with three different plug-in modules
(Europe, Great Britain, USA)
The device is powered by PoE (Power over
Ethernet) if it is connected to a switch with
PoE-functionality (
£
page 15).
CD containing Gigaset QuickSync™ PC soft-
ware
and this user guide
Insert strips for labelling
the function keys (with protective film)
12
First steps
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Setting up and connecting the device
The phone is designed for use in dry rooms in a temperature range of ±0°C to +45°C.
¤
Set up the phone at a central point where a connection to the local network is available.
Firmware update
Whenever there are new or improved functions for your Gigaset, firmware updates are made
available for you to download to your phone (page 168). If this results in operational
changes to your phone, a new version of this user guide or the necessary amendments are
published on the Internet at www.gigaset.com/pro
.
Select the product to open the relevant product page for your telephone, where you will find
a link to the user guide.
To find out what version of firmware is currently loaded on your phone, see page 170.
Warning
u
Never expose the Gigaset DE700 IP PRO to the following:
heat sources, direct sunlight or other electrical appliances.
u
Protect your Gigaset from moisture, dust, corrosive liquids and fumes.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
13
First steps
Connecting the receiver
§§1§§
Insert the connector, which can be found on the longer straight end of the connection ca-
ble, into the connection port on the bottom of the phone.
§§2§§
Place the straight part of the cable in the cable recess provided.
3 Insert the other jack on the connection cable into the port on the receiver.
1
2
3
14
First steps
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Connecting the network cable
To make calls via VoIP, your phone must have Internet access. This connection is established
in the local network via a gateway.
You connect your phone to the same local network as the gateway. See the Using the phone
in different scenarios section on page 9 for an overview of the different options.
§§1§§
Attach one end of the Ethernet cable supplied to the right-hand LAN port on the
rear of the phone.
§§2§§
Attach the other end of the Ethernet cable to a LAN port on your network Ether-
net switch or on the router itself.
Warning
If you connect your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO to a PoE-capable Ethernet switch (PoE class
IEEE802.3af), it will be supplied with power via PoE (Power over Ethernet). The PoE network
must not exceed the premises boundaries.
21
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
15
First steps
Connecting the PC
You must connect your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO to a PC to use the Web user interface or to con-
figure the phone using the Web configurator.
Your phone has an integrated two-port switch. This allows you to connect your PC to the local
network via the phone and avoid using additional connection ports on the switch or router.
You need an additional Ethernet cable to connect a PC.
§§1§§
Connect an Ethernet cable to the left-hand LAN port on the rear of the phone.
§§2§§
Connect the other end of the Ethernet cable to a LAN port on the PC.
Connecting a device to the mains power supply (if required)
Your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO is supplied with sufficient power by PoE (Power over Ethernet) and
does not need to be connected to the mains power supply. Prerequisite: The device is con-
nected to an Ethernet switch with PoE functionality (PoE class IEEE802.3af) (
£
page 14).
The power adapter is supplied with three different plug-in modules for Europe, Great Britain
and the USA. First attach the appropriate plug-in module to the power supply unit.
2
1
16
First steps
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
§§1§§
Slide the required plug-in module into the recess on the underside of the power supply
unit until it clicks into place.
§§2§§
To remove the plug-in module again, press on the button marked Push and pull the plug-
in module out of the power supply unit.
§§1§§
Connect the power adapter to the port on the rear of the phone.
§§2§§
Then insert the plug into the mains socket.
Warning
Use only the power adapter supplied.
Please note
You can safeguard your device against theft by fitting a Kensington lock. The corresponding
hole can be found on the rear of the device (
§§3§§
).
Europe
Geat Britain
USA
1
2
2
1
3
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
17
First steps
Connecting extension modules (optional)
You can increase the number of programmable keys using extension modules (max. three;
can be ordered as accessories
£
page 185). Each module includes 14 additional program-
mable keys. The function keys can be programmed using the Web configurator
(
£
page 154).
The package contains:
u
One extension module
u
One connection frame with four fastening screws
u
One connection cable
u
Insert strips
§§1§§
Position the extension module to the right of the phone (on left when viewed from below),
so that the module and phone are the same height and meet in the centre.
§§2§§
Insert the clasps on the connection frame into the respective notches on the phone and
module and push the connection frame upwards until it clicks into place. Secure the con-
nection frame with the screws provided.
§§3§§
Establish the connections using the cable supplied.
Extension module
1
3
Extension module Gigaset DE700 IP PRO
2
18
First steps
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Setting up the device (for the first time)
Your device will start automatically as soon as it is connected to the mains power supply.
Please be aware that the device is powered by PoE (Power over Ethernet). This means that it
is supplied with power as soon as it is connected to an Ethernet switch with PoE-functionality.
The first time you use the device, an installation wizard will start automatically and guide you
through the necessary installation steps.
Configuring language and time zone settings
When you have made your selection, press the end key
I
to return to the last entry screen.
You can correct your selection if necessary.
¤
Use the navigation key to select the
required language. To do this, press up or
down on the navigation key
q
.
Further information about the navigation
key can be found on
£
page 24.
¤
Press the display key under
§OK§
to confirm
your selection.
You can also use the OK function on the
navigation key (by pressing
?
in the cen-
tre of the key).
¤
Use the navigation key to select the
required time zone.
¤
Press the display key under
§OK§
to confirm
your selection.
Please note
The date and time are automatically set by a time server. You can select a time server using
the Web configurator or deactivate this function (
£
page 158).
Select your Language
OK
English
Deutsch
Francais
Italiano
Espanol
Portugues
Nederlands
Select your Time Zone
OK
GMT: Dublin, London
GMT+1: Amsterdam, Berlin, ...
GMT+2: Athens, Cairo, Israel
GMT+3: Bagdahd, Kuweit ...
GMT+4: Abu Dhabi, Mucat
GMT+5: Islamabad, Karachi
GMT+6: Dhaka, Colombo
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
19
First steps
Establishing a connection to the local network
Your phone must be connected to the local network before it can connect to the Internet and
before you can operate it from a PC.
The device checks to see if a network connection already exists. The network connection is
automatically established if the phone has automatically been assigned an IP address from a
DHCP server in the network. If this is the case, the following screen will not appear and you
can skip to
£
page 20.
If your phone has no network connection, you will need to configure the network manually.
Depending on the type of network, you will need the following information about the con-
figuration:
u
If the network uses IP protocol version 4 (IPv4) with a static IP address, you will need:
The device IP address, the network subnet mask, the IP addresses of the standard gateway
and DNS server.
u
If the network uses IP protocol version 6 (IPv6):
IP addresses automatically: select IPv6 as Network Type. The connection is then estab-
lished automatically.
IP addresses statically: the device IP address, the address prefix length and the DNS server
IP address.
If there is still no network connection, you will then be asked whether you wish to configure
the connection manually.
¤
Select
§§Yes§§
if you have the required information.
¤
Select
§§No§§
if you want to use the display menu to configure the network at a later date
(
£
page 93).
Your device is now connected to the local network and can be configured for Internet teleph-
ony.
Please note
The following network configuration is the default setting on your device: LAN with IP pro-
tocol version 4 (IPv4) and DHCP.
If you selected
§§Yes§§§
, you can configure the
network immediately.
Depending on your selection, additional
screens may be displayed so you can enter
the required information.
More detailed information on LANconfigura-
tion can be found on
£
page 93.
¤
Once you have configured the settings,
press the display key under
§§Save§§
.
Local Network
Back Save
Network Type
IPv4
Activated Network:
LAN
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
20
First steps
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Configuring Internet telephony
Before you can use the Internet to phone anyone over the Internet, the fixed line network or
the mobile phone network, you need the services of a VoIP provider.
Prerequisite:
You have a phone system in your network that provides VoIP accounts for your device,
or
You have registered with a VoIP provider (e.g., via your PC) and set up a VoIP account.
The device searches the network for a provisioning file and checks whether VoIP accounts
already exist. If the telephone has existing VoIP accounts, these accounts are configured auto-
matically. You can now make calls with your phone via the Internet.
If the telephone has no existing VoIP accounts, you must configure them manually. The Web
configurator's installation wizard will help you with this (
£
page 108).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / starting.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
21
First steps
Proceeding
Now you have successfully set up your phone, you can adapt it to your personal requirements.
Use the following guide to quickly locate the most important topics.
If you are unfamiliar with menu-driven devices such as other Gigaset telephones, you should
first read the section entitled Using the phone on page 22.
If you have any questions about using your phone, please read the tips on
troubleshooting (page 172) or contact our Customer Care team (page 172).
Operating the phone via the keypad and display menu
£
page 22
Making calls
£
page 31
Setting up and using directories
£
page 50
Displaying Internet services
£
page 72
Setting ringers
£
page 81
Setting the idle display and screensavers
£
page 84
Connecting a headset
£
page 99
Loading your own pictures and sounds
£
page 100
Setting up VoIP accounts
£
page 108
22
Using the phone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using the phone
You have a range of options for operating and configuring your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO in a
way that is convenient for you. For example, you can initiate a phone call or conference call
using the phone's keypad and display menu. You can access your local telephone directory
via the phone's display menu or the Web user interface You can change your configuration
settings using the display menu or the Web configurator.
If your phone is connected to a Gigaset T300 PRO or Gigaset T300 PRO phone system, you can
also use the capabilities of the phone system, such as Call Manager, centrally-stored call lists,
conference scheduling and function key assignment.
Operating via the keypad and display menu
Display and display keys
The display gives you quick access to all the functions on your phone, particularly the menu
functions.
In idle status, icons on the display indicate the status of your phone (
£
page 4). Alternatively,
you can select the information you wish to display, e.g., time, calendar or pictures
(
£
page 84).
Use the display keys to activate the phone's functions and to navigate through the menu. Dif-
ferent functions are available depending on the operating situation. These functions are dis-
played at the bottom of the screen.
Example:
Some important display keys:
§§Options§§
Open a menu for further functions.
§§OK§§
Confirm selection.
Delete key: Delete one character at a time from right to left.
§§Back§§
Skip back one menu level or cancel the operation.
§§Save§§
Save entry.
Copy the displayed entry to the directory.
Back OK
Current display key functions
Display keys
Û
?
ß
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
23
Using the phone
Writing and editing text
A text editor is provided for entering text via the keypad.
Deleting/correcting characters
Press the display key. The character to the left of the cursor is deleted. Press and
hold to delete the word to the left of the cursor.
Entry mode
A range of entry modes are available depending on the operating situation. The current
mode is displayed on the right-hand side of the editor field.
Abc Letters, first letter upper case, others lower case, e.g., for entering names.
abc Lower case only, e.g., for entering e-mail addresses.
123 Digits only for entering numbers.
Switching entry mode
#
Press the hash key. The text entry mode will change.
Moving the cursor
r
Press the navigation key briefly: moves the cursor one character at a time.
Press and hold the navigation key: moves the cursor word by word.
q
Press the navigation key: moves the cursor line by line. The cursor stays in a hor-
izontal position.
~
Enter the text.
Each key between
Q
and
O
is assigned
several letters and digits. Press the relevant
key a certain number of times to enter a
particular character.
For example k = 2 x the
5
key.
The characters available are shown in the
editor field. The highlighted character is
inserted to the left of the cursor.
Ûß
j
§k§
l 5
abc
Prepare Dialling
11:45
peter.black@k|
Û
?
24
Using the phone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Entering special characters
*
Press the star key. The table of special characters is displayed.
Navigation key
The navigation key enables you to access important telephone functions
quickly. You can use it to scroll through lists and directories with ease.
p
Select the required character.
§Insert§
Press the display key. The
selected character is inserted at
the cursor position.
In idle status
In menus and lists
Depending on the operating situation:
§§OK§§
,
§§Yes§§
,
§§Save§§
,
§§Select§§
or
§§Change§§
.
Copy a number that has been entered or is shown in the display into the
directory.
Press briefly:
Navigate to the line above/below.
Press and hold:
Scroll up/down the list one line at a time.
"Rotate" left or right (key is touch sensitive):
Quickly scroll through the list. Clockwise to scroll down. Anti-clockwise
to scroll up.
Back Insert
Special Characters
;:,.-+*#
§%&@? ! ¡
{}()[]<>
¥£$ | ~^
_’ " =/ \
Open
redial list
Open
directory
Open
main menu
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
25
Using the phone
Understanding the navigation key
The following illustrations demonstrate how to use the navigation key:
Using the menus
Your telephone's functions are accessed using a menu that has a number of levels.
Opening the main menu
¤
When the phone is in idle status, press the centre of the navigation key
.
Accessing a function or opening the corresponding submenu
¤
Navigate to the required entry using the navigation key
q
and press the
§OK§
display key
or the
navigation key.
Back to the previous level
¤
Press the
§Back§
display key or briefly press the end key
I
.
The current operation is cancelled and you will return to the previous menu level.
You can revert to idle status from the main menu.
In input fields
Move the cursor up/down
line by line
Press briefly:
Move the cursor to the left/right one character at a time.
Press and hold:
Move the cursor to the left/right quickly.
Press the centre of the navigation key.
stuv
Press down/up/left/right on the navigation key.
w
Rotate the navigation key to scroll quickly up/down a list.
The display menu functions are shown as a
list with the respective icons.
An orange box identifies the selected func-
tion.
Back OK
Select Services
Additional Features
Organizer
Messages
Call Lists
Contacts
Settings
26
Using the phone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Reverting to idle status
You can revert to idle status from anywhere in the display menu as follows:
¤
Press and hold the end key
I
.
Or:
¤
Do not press any key: After 3 minutes the display will automatically revert to idle status.
Settings that have not been saved by selecting the display keys
§OK§
,
§Yes§
,
§Save§
or
§Change§
or
the navigation key
are lost.
Scrolling through lists
If it is not possible to view all of the functions/
list entries at the same time (list is too long),
arrows appear on the right-hand side. The
arrows indicate the direction in which you
need to scroll to view the rest of the entries in
the list.
Copy to Directory
Back
OK
Adam
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
27
Using the phone
Understanding the operating steps
The operating steps used to navigate through the display menu are shown in abbreviated
form.
For example, setting the ringer volume
¢
Settings
¢
Audio Settings
¢
Ringer Settings
¢
Volume
means:
¤
Press the centre of the navigation key to
open the main menu.
¤
Navigate up/down using the navigation
key
q
until the Settings submenu is
selected.
¤
Press the display key
§OK§
to confirm your
selection.
Back OK
Select Services
Additional Features
Organizer
Messages
Call Lists
Contacts
Settings
28
Using the phone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
¤
Continue to navigate through the menu
using the navigation and display key until
you reach the Volume submenu.
Settings
Back OK
Date / Time
Audio Settings
Display
Language
Connectivity
Reset
Audio Settings
Back
OK
Ringer Settings
Advisory Tones
Volume
Back Save
Calls:
Ringer Settings
Back OK
Volume
Melodies
Anon. Call Silencing
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
29
Using the phone
Menu tree
The following menu tree shows all the components of the display menu.
Select Services Next Call anonymous
£
page 38
All Calls anonymous
£
page 38
Call Divert
£
page 43
Call Waiting
£
page 39
Active Ringbacks
£
page 34
Additional Features Internet Radio
£
page 74
Resource Directory Screensavers
£
page 101
Caller Pictures
£
page 102
Sounds
£
page 103
Capacity
£
page 104
Organizer Calendar
£
page 68
Alarm Clock
£
page 70
Missed Alarms
£
page 69
Messages Voice Mail
£
page 61
Call Records
£
page 63
E-mail
£
page 64
Call Lists All Calls
£
page 46
Outgoing Calls
£
page 46
Accepted Calls
£
page 46
Missed Calls
£
page 46
Contacts Directory
£
page 50
You can choose any name
LDAP Directory
£
page 56
Online directories
£
page 57 The name of these menu entries
depends on Web configurator settings
£
page 150.
Settings
¢
continues on the next page
30
Using the phone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / using.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Settings Info
£
page 80
Date / Time
£
page 80
Audio Settings Ringer Settings Volume
£
page 81
Melodies
£
page 82
Anon. Call Silenc-
ing
£
page 83
Advisory Tones
£
page 84
Display Idle Display
£
page 84
Screensaver
£
page 89
Backlight
£
page 91
Language
£
page 92
Connectivity Local Network
£
page 94
Reset
£
page 92
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
31
Making calls
Making calls
Calling
You make your calls using the default account if you do not make another selection. The first
account that is created is used as the default account. You can change this using the Web con-
figurator (
£
page 132).
Selecting VoIP account
Entering a number using the keypad
You make a call using the phone's receiver, speaker kit or a connected headset (
£
page 99).
~
Enter the phone number.
c
Lift the receiver.
Or
c
Lift the receiver.
~
Enter the phone number.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key.
The number is dialled.
The duration of the call is shown while the call is in progress.
Instead of putting the receiver to your ear:
A
Press the speaker key to make a call via the speaker.
B
Press the headset key to make a call via the headset.
You can also switch at any time during the call. Throughout the whole of this section, the
c
icon can always represent either
A
or
B
.
If there are several VoIP accounts available on
your device, you can select the account you
wish to use for the call.
§§Select Line§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the required account.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the selection.
Call Select Line
32
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
When entering the phone number:
Û
Press the display key to delete incorrectly entered figures to the left of the cursor.
ß
Press the display key to copy entered phone numbers to the local directory
(
£
page 50).
I
Press the end key to cancel dialling.
Dialling a number from the directory
You can save up to 500 entries (vCards) in the local directory. You can create directory entries
and manage them quickly and easily using the Web user interface (
£
page 163) or the
phone's display menu (
£
page 50).
To dial a number proceed as follows:
Z
Open the directory using the navigation key
s
.
Or use the display menu
¢
Contacts
¢
Directory
q
Scroll through the list to the required
name.
Press
U
to show the details for the
entry.
c
Lift the receiver. The number is dialled.
q
If more than one number is assigned to
the entry, select the required number. If
you do not select a number, the default
phone number will be dialled after a
brief period.
Adam
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
View Options
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Forster, Fred
Judy
F
B
C
D
E
G
H
I
J
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
33
Making calls
Dialling a number using a function key
You can assign phone numbers to up to 14 function keys; you then only need to press a key
once to dial the number. You can increase the number of function keys by connecting exten-
sion modules. Use the Web configurator to assign numbers to the function keys
(
£
page 154).
S
Press the function key.
The number assigned to the function key is dialled.
Shared line
The Gigaset DE700 IP PRO allows one VoIP account to be used jointly by multiple phones. The
phone number for the shared account is assigned to a function key.
Prerequisites:
u
Your phone system supports this function. All users who share a VoIP account are merged
into one group on the phone system.
u
The VoIP account for the shared line is assigned to a function key (
£
page 154).
If you make a call via the function key on a "split line", the corresponding function keys light
up on all the extensions in this group. The users of these extensions cannot use the "split line"
until it is back in idle status or the call is put on hold or ended.
Dialling a number from the call lists
The following calls are saved:
u
Outgoing calls (redial list)
u
Accepted calls
u
Missed calls
The last 30 numbers are stored in each of the call lists. The name will appear on the display if
you have saved the number in the directory.
You can browse through the entries and dial directly from within the record.
If there are new entries in the missed calls list, the Message Centre key
E
flashes.
To save numbers from a list in the directory, see (
£
page 46).
Viewing call lists and dialling numbers
Open the required call list:
È
Open the redial list using the navigation key
t
.
E
Open the list of missed messages in the Message Centre.
Or use the display menu
¢
Call Lists
¢
All Calls
¢
Call Lists
¢
Outgoing Calls
¢
Call Lists
¢
Missed Calls
¢
Call Lists
¢
Accepted Calls
34
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
The last (most recent) call or dialled phone number is shown on the display.
Initiating ringback
You can initiate a ringback if the number you have called is busy. Prerequisite: This function
is supported by your phone system or your provider.
§§Ringback§§
Press the display key to initiate a ringback.
Ringback is initiated as soon as the line is free again.
Deactivating ringback
You can deactivate the ringback for all of the VoIP accounts configured on your phone or just
for certain VoIP accounts.
¢
Select Services
¢
Active Ringbacks
Accounts for which ringback is permitted are marked with a tick.
q
Select the required entry.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to remove a tick and to deactivate the ringback.
q
Select another entry if necessary.
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
Please note
You can also access the call lists using the Web user interface (
£
page 165).
All Calls
View Options
Brown, Tim
via
§§1§§
Account1
Today, 00:07 Duration 00:05:20
1/30
š
Brown, Tim
via §§1§§MyOffice
01.05.10, 12:20
š
Miller, Peter
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
35
Making calls
Receiving incoming calls
You hear the ringer and the speaker key
A
flashes.
If the function key has been assigned a „shared line“ (
£
page 33), an incoming call is indi-
cated on all extensions by the flashing of the corresponding function keys. The call can be
answered on any extension by pressing the function key.
Deactivating the ringer
§§Silence§§
Press the display key to deactivate the ringer. You can then decide whether to
accept or reject the call.
Rejecting a call
§§Reject§§
Press the display key or the end key
I
to reject the call.
Ending a call
&
Put down the receiver or press the end key
I
.
The display shows the caller's number (where
calling line identification is permitted
£
page 38) and their name, if they are saved
in the directory. If a picture is assigned to the
caller, this will also appear.
The account that the call is received on is also
shown.
c
Lift the receiver. You can speak to the
caller.
Please note
When you receive a call, the phone first of all searches for a corresponding entry in the
local directory. If the number doesn't appear there, the other directories are searched (if
configured) (
£
page 150).
Reject Silence
Brown, Tim
§§1§§ Account1
l
1234567890
ã
08:00 Amsterdam
36
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using functions when making a telephone call
Display when establishing a connection or during a call
W
Connection icon. This indicates the status of the connection.
HDSP in the screen picture indicates a connection with the highest voice quality.
09:13 The duration of the call is displayed under the screen picture.
§§Info§§
Press the display key to view technical information about the phone. This func-
tion is helpful when calling the Service Hotline, for example.
Adjusting the volume
You can adjust the volume of the receiver, speaker kit or headset during a call. You can adjust
the volume of the ringer while the phone is ringing.
H
To decrease the volume press the left side of the key and to increase the volume
press the right side of the key. Each time you press the key, the volume will
increase or decrease by one level.
The last setting is saved when you change the ringer volume.
Use the display menu to permanently configure the ringer melody and volume (
£
page 81).
The display shows
u
The VoIP account you are using to make
the call.
The
¯
icon next to the account descrip-
tion indicates that it is an encrypted con-
nection.
u
The caller's number (where calling line
identification is permitted
£
page 38)
and their name, if they are saved in the
directory. If a picture is assigned to the
caller, this will also appear.
z
Establishing a connection
X
Connection interrupted
W
Connection established
œ
Conference call
There are ten volume settings available. The current setting is shown on the dis-
play.
Connection
11:45
Info
ä1234567890
Brown, Tim
via
§§1§§
Account1
¯
z
09:13
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
37
Making calls
Muting
You can deactivate the microphone for the receiver, the speaker kit and the headset. The
other party can then no longer hear you.
C
Press the mute key during the phone call.
Press the key again to reactivate the microphone.
The
C
key is lit up while the function is activated.
Activating/deactivating speaker mode
Activating via the receiver during a call:
A
&
Press the speaker key and put down the receiver.
The
A
key is lit up while the function is activated.
In speaker mode, you hear the caller via the speaker.
Deactivating speaker mode during a call:
c
Lift the receiver. Continue the call via the receiver.
Do not disturb
You can activate the Do Not Disturb (DND) function if you do not want to receive any calls and
you do not want the phone to ring.
You can still make calls when this function is activated.
G
Press the Do Not Disturb key.
Press the same key again to deactivate the function.
The
G
key is lit up while the function is activated.
Please note
You should tell your caller if you have activated the speaker.
Please note
u
You can permanently deactivate the ringer for anonymous calls (
£
page 83).
u
You can use the Web configurator to create a blacklist of unwanted names and num-
bers (
£
page 141). Once you activate the blacklist function, calls from these numbers
will not be put through.
38
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Two-way recording
You can record your two-way telephone conversations.
F
Press the call records key.
Press the key again to end the call record.
The
F
key is lit up while the function is activated.
The phone memory can store two-way call records of up to 30 minutes. Calls can also be
recorded onto a server (
£
page 141).
Go into the display menu to play back and delete two-way call recordings Messages
¢
Call
Records (
£
page 63).
Anonymous calling – withholding caller ID
You can make anonymous calls (CLIR = Calling Line Identification Restriction). Your phone
number will not be displayed when making outgoing calls. You are calling anonymously.
Prerequisite: Anonymous calls are only possible via VoIP connections through providers that
support the "anonymous calling" function. You may have to ask your VoIP provider to activate
this function.
Making an anonymous call
Select:
¢
Select Services
¢
Next Call anonymous
Then proceed as normal:
~
Enter the phone number.
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled. Your number is not transferred.
Activating/deactivating "anonymous calling" for all calls
You can permanently activate/deactivate the anonymous call function for all of the VoIP
accounts configured on your phone or just for certain accounts.
¢
Select Services
¢
All Calls anonymous
Accounts for which anonymous calling is permitted are marked with a tick.
q
Select the required entry.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to tick the box.
Press the display key again to remove the tick.
Please note
u
Conference calls cannot be recorded.
u
You should tell your caller if you are recording a two-way conversation.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
39
Making calls
Making a call to multiple participants
Initiating a consultation call
During a call, you want to consult a second participant.
J
Press the consultation call key during the call.
The call is placed on hold. You can make another call to a second participant. Once the call
has ended, press the consultation key again. You are reconnected to the first participant.
Accepting/rejecting call waiting
You hear the call waiting tone during a phone call.
Accepting a call:
§§Accept§§
Press the display key to accept the call.
Rejecting a call:
§§Reject§§
Press the display key to reject the waiting call.
The display shows the caller's number (where
calling line identification is permitted
£
page 38) and their name, if they are saved
in the directory.
The display also shows the subscriber num-
ber used to receive the call and indicates
whether this is a ringback.
You are connected to the waiting participant.
The first participant hears music on hold. The
number is displayed and the
à
icon identi-
fies it as the waiting participant.
q
Select the connection.
§§Remove§§
Press the display key to end the
selected connection.
Accept Reject
Tim Brown
§§1§§ Account1
1234567890
Ù
Ø
Call Swap
11:45
Remove
...90987654321
via §§1§§ Account1
Add Particip.
W
09:13
à
0981234567890
40
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Activating/deactivating call waiting
You can deactivate call waiting during a call for all of the accounts configured on your phone
or just for certain accounts.
¢
Select Services
¢
Call Waiting
Accounts for which call waiting is permitted are marked with a tick. Callers via other accounts
hear the busy tone.
q
Select the required entry.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to tick the box.
Press the display key again to remove the tick.
Call swapping
You are speaking to one participant and a second is on hold; this may be because you have
accepted a waiting call or have placed one caller on hold.
J
Press the consultation call key to swap from one caller to the other.
Initiating a consultation call with a third participant:
§§Add Particip.§§
Press the display key. Both participants are placed on hold.
~
Enter the phone number for the third participant.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key. The number is dialled.
To speak to one of the participants on hold again after you have finished the ringback:
q
Select the relevant participant.
J
Press the ringback key.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
41
Making calls
Initiating a conference
You are speaking to one participant while another is on hold.
q
Select the participant who is on hold.
K
Press the conference key to add the waiting participant to a conference.
Or
You are speaking to one or more participants and you wish to add an additional participant.
K
Press the conference key.
~
Enter the phone number for the additional participant.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key. The number is dialled.
As soon as the participant answers, they are automatically connected to the conference call.
§§Add Particip.§§
Press the display key to begin a consultation call with another participant. In con-
trast to conference key
K
. The conference participants are put on hold.
All the participants in the conference are
listed on the display.
Removing a participant from the confer-
ence call:
q
Select the participant.
§§Remove§§
Press the display key to end the
conference for the highlighted
participant.
Conference
11:45
Remove
...90987654321
Add Particip.
œ
09:13
0981234567890
...981234567890
42
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Transferring a call to another number
You are speaking to one participant and you want to transfer the call to a third participant.
Transfer without consultation:
L
Press the transfer key. The call is placed on hold.
~
Enter the phone number for the participant to whom you want to transfer the
call.
L
Press the transfer key again. The call is transferred to the number you have
dialled. Your connection to the participant is ended.
Transfer with consultation:
Use this function to ensure that the connection is actually established.
L
Press the transfer key. The call is placed on hold.
~
Enter the phone number for the participant to whom you want to transfer the
call.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key. The number is dialled.
You can now hang up or press the transfer key
L
to forward the call.
When you call the third participant you can also wait for them to answer and speak to them,
for instance to tell them you are forwarding a call. Then press the transfer key
L
.
Transfer to participants on hold:
You are speaking to one participant and there are others on hold. You can transfer the current
call to one of the participants on hold.
q
Select one of the participants on hold.
L
Press the transfer key. The chosen participant is connected to the person you are
currently speaking to.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
43
Making calls
Setting up call divert (CD)
When diverting a call, the call is forwarded to another connection. You can set up call divert
differently for each connection (i.e. for each configured VoIP account).
Prerequisite: You VoIP provider supports call divert or the service is provided by a phone sys-
tem.
Call divert using the provider's network services
¢
Select Services
¢
Call Divert
The list contains the accounts configured on your telephone.
q
Select the desired account.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the settings for this account.
r
Switch Activation on/off.
s
Select To Phone Number.
~
Enter the phone number to which the
call should be diverted.
s
Select When.
r
Select when call divert should apply:
All Calls All calls are diverted.
No Answer Calls are diverted if no one accepts the call within several rings.
When Busy Calls are diverted if your line is busy.
Note
Please also refer to:
u
Setting up call divert via the Web configurator (
£
page 138).
u
Programming call divert to function keys (
£
page 156).
Call Divert
Back Save
Activation:
On
To Phone Number:
When:
All Calls
§§1§§Account1
44
Making calls
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Call divert using the phone system
If your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO is connected to a Gigaset phone system, call divert is saved to
the phone system and not the phone. You can set up call divert for each number assigned to
your phone.
¢
Select Services
¢
Call Divert
The list contains the accounts configured on your telephone.
q
Select the desired account.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
If there are multiple numbers assigned to the account on the phone system, these are dis-
played.
q
Select the number for which you wish to set up a divert.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
The account and number selected are shown
in the top right of the display. Active call
diverts are marked with a .
¤
Select the call divert you wish to edit.
All Calls All calls are diverted.
When Busy Calls are diverted if your line is busy.
No Answer Calls are diverted if no one accepts the call within several rings. The also
applies to calls in call waiting that are not accepted.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to edit the call divert.
Call Divert
Back OK
All Calls
When Busy
No Answer
§§1§§... 2345
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / telephony.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
45
Making calls
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the settings for this account.
r
Switch call divert on/off.
s
Select To.
You can divert calls to an answering machine
or phone number.
r
Select Voice Mail or Number.
~
Enter the number of the voice mail ser-
vice or phone number to which the call
should be diverted.
For a call divert of the type No Answer, select
a length of time after which the call should be
diverted.
r
Select the desired length of time.
You can choose from values ranging from 5 to
120 seconds.
Call Divert
Back Save
When Busy:
On
To:
Voice Mail
Voice Mail
Mailbox 2
§§1§§... 2345
W
Call Divert
Back Save
To:
Number
Number:
1234567890
After x seconds
15
§§1§§... 2345
W
46
Using the call lists
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using the call lists
The following call lists are available:
A maximum of 30 entries is saved in the lists. The next entry overwrites the oldest one. You
can access all of the lists via the display menu.
Viewing entries
You can open a list when the telephone is in idle status via the display menu.
¢
Call Lists
¢
All Calls
¢
Call Lists
¢
Outgoing Calls
¢
Call Lists
¢
Accepted Calls
¢
Call Lists
¢
Missed Calls
All Calls All outgoing, accepted and missed calls.
Outgoing Calls Last dialled numbers (redial list).
Accepted Calls Calls that were accepted.
Missed Calls Calls that were not answered.
If the list contains entries that you have not yet viewed, the display
shows the
icon and the number of new entries. You can also
access the list via the Message Centre (
£
page 67).
Note
You can also access the call lists using the Web user interface (
£
page 165).
If your telephone is connected to a Gigaset T500 PRO or Gigaset T300 PRO phone system,
calls are managed by the phone system rather than locally using the telephone and are
transferred to all phones assigned to it.
The calls are displayed in chronological order,
from the most recent through to the oldest.
The number of the selected entry and the
total number of entries in the list (e.g., 1/30) is
displayed in the top right corner.
An icon is shown in front of each entry to indi-
cate whether it is an outgoing (
š
), accepted
(
) or missed (
) call.
All Calls
View Options
Brown, Tim
via
§§1§§
Account1
Today,, 00:07 Duration 00:05:20
1/30
š
Brown, Tim
via §§1§§MyOffice
01.05.10, 12:20
š
Black, Susan
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
47
Using the call lists
Information on the entry:
u
Phone number of the caller/called party. If the number is saved in the directory, the name
is displayed instead.
u
VoIP account on which the call was made/received.
u
Date and time of the call. Outgoing calls also include the duration of the connection.
The information displayed is determined by the information transferred by the caller and
whether or not the caller appears in the directory.
If the caller has activated CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation), the caller's phone
number is identified. The caller can then be identified by this number if he or she is already
saved in the directory. Prerequisite: The feature is activated for the VoIP account.
Displaying detailed information
§§View§§
Press the display key. The information available is displayed, with the phone
number as a minimum.
If the number is saved in the directory, the
directory entry is displayed (
£
page 50).
Please note
When you receive a call, the phone first of all searches for a corresponding entry in the
local directory. If the number doesn't appear there, the other directories are searched (if
configured) (
£
page 150).
Susan Black
Teacher
School
Back Dial
+471(076)4567890123
+49(698)987654321
+345(678)345621
+377(098)1234567890
»ÅÐ
ä
k
l
l
48
Using the call lists
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Dialling a number from a list
You have the following options for dialling a phone number from a list:
Or
q
Scroll through the list to the required
name.
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
q
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
§§View§§
Press the display key to show the
entry.
c
Lift the receiver.
Or
§§Dial§§
Press the display key.
The number is dialled.
All Calls
View Options
Brown, Tim
via
§§1§§
Account1
Today, 00:07 Duration 00:05:20
1/30
š
Brown, Tim
via §§1§§MyOffice
01.05.10, 12:20
š
Black, Susan
Back Dial
+49(123)1234567890
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
49
Using the call lists
Copying an entry from the call list to the directory.
Deleting an entry or list
q
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the Copy to Directory
entry.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the action.
The directory is opened.
You can create a new entry in the directory or
edit an existing one.
See directory
£
page 52.
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the required action:
Delete Entry or Delete List
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the action.
You must confirm the action again.
Back OK
Copy to Directory
š
00991234567890
Delete Entry
Delete List
via
§§1§§
Account1
All Calls
Copy to Directory
Back
OK
<New Entry>
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Back OK
Copy to Directory
š
00991234567890
Delete Entry
Delete List
via
§§1§§
Account1
All Calls
50
Using directories
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using directories
The options are:
u
Local directory
u
LDAP directory
£
page 56
u
Personal or public online directory
£
page 57
Using the local directory
You can save a total of 500 entries in the local directory.
Directory entries are saved in the form of vCards. These are virtual business cards for exchang-
ing contact information (file extension .vcf). You can assign a picture to a directory entry. This
must be held in the phone's resource directory (
£
page 102).
You create a personalised directory.
Please note
The default directory is the local directory. This is the directory that you can open with the
Z
key and the directory to which entries are saved using the "Copy to Directory" func-
tion.
You can set a different directory as the default directory via the Web configurator
(
£
page 155).
Notes
u
You can also access your local directory via the Web user interface (
£
page 163).
u
You can synchronise your telephone's directory with Outlook. The "Gigaset Quick-
Sync" program must be installed on your computer in order to do this. The program is
provided on the product CD.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
51
Using directories
Directory entries
An icon in front of a phone number indicates whether it is a home (
ä
), office (
k
) or mobile
number (
l
).
Opening the directory
Open the directory in idle status with the
Z
key (navigation key
s
)
Or use the display menu
¢
Contacts
¢
Directory
Displaying an entry
A directory entry contains the following
information:
u
First name, surname, picture
u
Up to seven phone numbers
u
E-mail address, Web address, fax number
u
Job title/position, company, address
u
Birthday, time zone, further information
q
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
§§View§§
Press the display key. The entry is
shown with all tabs as in the illus-
tration on page 51.
U
Press the arrow to the right of
the entry. The entry will be
shown as an overview screen.
Susan Black
Teacher
School
Edit Delete
+471(076)4567890123
+49(698)987654321
+345(678)345621
+377(098)1234567890
»ÅÐ
ä
k
l
l
V
Adam
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
A
View Options
Forster, Fred
V
B
C
D
E
52
Using directories
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Creating a new entry
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to start the New Entry action.
Each directory entry has five tabs.
r
Scroll from tab to tab.
q
Navigate to the required field or to the tab level.
Tab 1: Entering the name
~
Enter the Name and First Name.
For information on entering text
£
page 23.
Assigning a picture:
If you wish to assign a personal picture, it
must be saved in the phone's resource direc-
tory (
£
page 102).
As soon as you select the Picture field, the
first available picture is shown.
r
Scroll through the list.
§View§§
Show the picture in the display
size.
New Entry
Back Save
V
•»ÅÐ_
First Name:
Surname:
Picture:
Abc
View Save
New Entry
W
•»ÅÐ_
Forster
Picture:
TU
forster_fred
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
53
Using directories
§§Save§
Save the directory entry if you have entered all the data.
Tab 2: Entering the phone number
You can enter up to seven phone numbers.
One of the phone numbers must be assigned
as the default phone number (
£
page 54).
q
Select the New Number entry.
§§OK§§
Confirm the selection.
r
Select the type (Office/Home/Mobile /
URI),
~
Enter the phone number.
r
Select the Ye s option in the Default
Number field if this is to be the default
phone number.
The following information can be saved in the
other tabs:
Tab 3: E-mail, Web Address, Fax
Tab 4: Job Title, Company, Street, City,
ZIP, Country
Tab 5: Birthday, Time Zone, Notes
If you activate the Reminder function, the
birthday will be shown as an alarm on the dis-
play (
£
page 69).
New Entry
Back Save
V
»ÅÐ_
Type:
New Number:
Default Number:
Office
TU
No
New Entry
•»ÅÐ_
Birthday:
Time Zone:
Notes:
Back Save
V
01.09.1982
(GMT+01:00) Amsterdam, Berlin,
54
Using directories
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Editing entries
Changing the default number
The default phone number is the first number in the participant's list and is dialled first. You
can change the default phone number.
q
Scroll to the required directory
entry.
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Edit Entry.
Directory entry fields can be edited. The pro-
cedure is the same as for Creating a new
entry.
q
Scroll to the required directory
entry.
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Change Default No..
§§§OK§§
Confirm the selection.
q
Select the required number.
§§§OK§§
Confirm the selection.
Susan Black
Back Save
V
•»ÅÐ_
First Name:
Surname:
Picture:
Abc
Susan
Black
Change Default No.
Back OK
+471(076)4567890123
+49(698)987654321
+345(678)345621
+377(098)1234567890
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
55
Using directories
Deleting a directory entry or the entire directory
Deleting a selected entry from the list:
q
Scroll to the required entry.
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Delete Entry.
§§§OK§§
Confirm the selection.
Or
§§View§§
¢
§§Delete§§
Press the display keys in sequence.
§Yes§
Confirm the deletion.
Deleting the entire list:
§§Options§§
Press the display key
q
Select Delete List.
§Yes§
Confirm the deletion.
Selecting a number from the directory
q
Scroll to the required entry.
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
If several numbers are saved on the vCard, a list of numbers is displayed once the receiver is
lifted. If you do not select a number, the default phone number will be dialled after a brief
period (
£
page 54).
56
Using directories
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using an LDAP directory
If your corporate network provides a directory via an LDAP server, you can access this on your
phone (LDAP = Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). Prerequisite: You have set up this
function via the Web configurator (
£
page 151).
You can give the LDAP directory a name in the Web configurator. This will then appear in the
display in place of LDAP Directory.
Opening an LDAP directory
You can open the LDAP directory in idle status via the display menu
¢
Contacts
¢
LDAP Directory
Or
Z
Press and hold (navigation key
s
).
Searching for and displaying an entry
Dialling from the LDAP directory
~
Enter the name (or first few letters).
For information on entering text
£
page 23
The search will automatically start as soon as
you stop inputting characters.
All matching entries are displayed. The search
field is displayed again if no matching entries
are found. You can start a new search.
q
Scroll to the required entry.
§§View§§
Press the display key.
The entry will be displayed.
Display the entry.
§§Dial§§
Press the display key
Or
c
Lift the receiver.
The number is dialled.
B
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
B
Û
View
Burger, Mary
V
åU
C
D
E
F
A
Susan Black
Teacher
School
Back Dial
+471(076)4567890123
+49(698)987654321
+345(678)345621
+377(098)1234567890
»ÅÐ
ä
k
l
l
V
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
57
Using directories
Using online directories
Online directories are available on the Internet. You can:
u
Use public online directories that are available on the Internet, such as KlickTel or the Yel-
low Pages and
u
Create a personal online directory if your provider permits this.
Select which public online directory you want to use via the Web configurator (
£
page 150).
u
White Pages
a public directory provided on the Internet
u
Yel low Pages
yellow pages provided on the Internet
u
Private NetDirectory
Some providers offer users the option of creating and managing a personal online direc-
tory on the Internet.
You can use the personal online directory on your phone.
Prerequisite:
You enter the data for the provider of your personal online directory in the Web config-
urator (
£
page 150)
You must create and manage your personal online directory using your PC's Web
browser.
Opening a online directory
You can open a online directory in idle status via the display menu
¢
Contacts
¢
Name of directory
Select the required public or private online directory. The directory name depends on the set-
tings for the directory in the Web configurator. It can be the name the provider uses for their
directory or a name you have chosen yourself.
58
Using directories
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Searching for an entry in the online directory
You can search for a phone number or a name. Provided that you haven't entered a search cri-
terion, you can switch between a
§§Name Search§§
and a
§§Number Search§§
.
Searching for a number
~
Enter the surname and city of the sub-
scriber you are looking for.
For information on entering text
£
page 23
The last five locations for which you have car-
ried out a search are displayed in the City
field. You can select one of these instead of
entering a city via the keypad.
§§Search§§
Press the display key to start the
search.
If several entries are found for the city, a list is
displayed so that you can narrow down the
location search.
Please note: The City field is not available in
the private directory.
Name Search
A
§B§
C 2
Abc
Online
Number Search
Surname:
City:
Berlin
B|
Paris
V
Û
Search
G
§H§
I4
Abc
Online
Number Search
City:
Berlin
H|
W
V
Paris
Roma
London
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
59
Using directories
Searching for a name
A message is displayed if no entry is found. You can then:
§§Change§§
Press the display key to change your search request.
Or
§New Search§§
Press the display key to start a new search.
Search results
§§Name Search§§
Press the display key.
~
Enter the number for the entry
you are searching for.
§§Search§§
Press the display key to start the
search.
Search results are displayed as a list.
If more than 99 entries are found, a message
including the number of results found is dis-
played. You can then refine the search or
request for the entire list to be displayed.
Refining a search:
§§Refined Search§§
Press the display key.
Number Search Search
123
Online
Name Search
Number:
123|
Online
View Refined Search
Brown, Albert
Place 1, 12345 London
W
V
Brown, Albert
Street 2, 67890 London
Brown, Andrew
Road 3, 23456 London
Brown, Antony
60
Using directories
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / lists+directories.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Transferring a number to the local directory
Specify your search request in the various
fields.
Surname, First name, Category/Name or
Street.
§§Search§§
Press the display key to restart
the search.
Displaying entry details:
q
Scroll to the required entry.
§§View§§
Press the display key.
The tabs contain the available phone num-
bers and address information.
r
Scroll from tab to tab.
Dialling a number:
q
Select the number.
~
Lift the receiver.
You can transfer entries from a online direc-
tory to your local directory.
ß
Press the display key.
You can create a new entry in the directory or
edit an existing one.
See directory
£
page 52.
Online
Û
Search
Surname:
Brown
V
First Name:
Su|
T
§U§
V8
abc
Online
ß
New Search
+49(698)987654321
+345(678)345621
+377(098)1234567890
•Å
ä
k
l
Copy to Directory
Back
OK
<New Entry>
Black, Susan
Brown, Tim
Forster, Fred
Judy
Miller, Peter
White, Phil
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
61
Managing messages
Managing messages
You can access the following message types via the display menu:
u
Voice mails on network mailboxes
u
Recorded calls (
£
page 63)
u
E-mails (
£
page 64)
The Message Centre also allows you to access voice mails, missed calls, e-mails and missed
alarms at the press of a key (
£
page 67).
Voice mails on the network mailbox
You can listen to your messages that have been recorded on a network mailbox. Each network
mailbox accepts incoming calls on the corresponding VoIP phone number. Network mail-
boxes are provided by a Gigaset T500 PRO or Gigaset T300 PRO phone system, for example,
or you can use a network mailbox offered by an Internet provider.
Prerequisite: Voice mail boxes must be set up for your VoIP accounts on the phone system.
You can set up internet provider network mailboxes in the Web configurator (
£
page 142).
If there are new messages on the network mailbox, these are indicated by the
Ã
icon. The
number of new messages is displayed to the right.
You can also access your network mailbox via the Message Centre (
£
page 67). The
E
key
flashes if a new message has been received on the network mailbox.
Displaying voice mails
Display recorded messages via the display menu:
¢
Messages
¢
Voice Mail
Display recorded messages via the Message Centre:
E
¢
Voice Mail
A list of available network mailboxes
arranged in order of VoIP accounts is dis-
played along with the number of new and old
messages.
q
Scroll through the list to the desired
network mailbox.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to connect to the
network mailbox.
Voice Mail
Back OK
§1§
Account1
2 old messages
§4§ Account4
10 new messages
§5§ Account5
8 new messages
3 old messages
62
Managing messages
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Voice mails are displayed in the following categories:
Inbox: Newly received voice mails.
Private: Voice mails from numbers marked as private in the directory.
Old: Messages that have already been played, or which have been moved to the "Old"
folder on the Gigaset telephone system.
q
Select the desired category and confirm by pressing
§§OK§§
.
Playing a message
§Play§
Press the display key to listen to the message.
The message is played via the loudspeaker. Alternatively, you can start playback
with
or
A
.
Or
c
Lift the receiver to start playback over the receiver.
Ending playback
§Stop§
Press the display key to end playback.
Alternatively, press the speaker key
A
or replace the receiver.
q
Select another voice mail with the navigation key. Current playback is ended and
playback of the newly selected message is started.
The stored messages are listed in chronologi-
cal order.
The number of the selected message and the
number of entries in the list are shown in the
top right corner.
q
Select the desired message.
Note
An incoming call ends playback.
Inbox
Play Options
+4989123456789
for 100000
Peter
20.04.12 19:06
567890
Today, 10:30
for 120000
1/80
Duration: 05:14
Duration: 00:22
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
63
Managing messages
Call records
You can record a two-way telephone conversation (
£
page 38).
The phone saves two-way call records of up to 30 minutes in MP3 format. If your network has
a server, you can also save call records there. You can set this up using the Web configurator
(
£
page 141).
Playing back call records
You can manage recorded conversations via the display menu.
¢
Messages
¢
Call Records
If more than one VoIP account is configured on your phone, first select the account. The call
records for this account are displayed.
By default, call records are played back via the speaker. If a headset is connected, you can lis-
ten to the playback through this.
The call records are displayed in chronologi-
cal order, from the most recent through to
the oldest.
The name of the call participant and the date/
time of the call record are displayed.
If there are several VoIP accounts, the account
is displayed in the top right-hand corner.
Playing back a call record:
q
Scroll through the list to the
required call record.
§§Play§§
Start playback.
The name of the participant will be displayed
during playback. The elapsed time and the
total duration of the call record are displayed
in the top right corner.
§§Stop§§
End playback.
§§Pause§§
Pause playback.
Continue playback with
§§Con-
tinue§§
.
Call Records
Play Delete
Brown, Tim
14.05.10, 16:27 - 16:30
V
Miller, Peter
12.05.10, 10:14 - 10:18
Black, Susan
10.05.10, 18:20 - 18:22
James
§§1§§Account1
Stop Pause
Call Participant:
Susan Black
Ð
Playback
64
Managing messages
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Deleting call records
Managing e-mail messages
Your phone will notify you when new e-mail messages have been received on your incoming
e-mail server. You can connect to this server and display the sender, date/time of receipt, sub-
ject and body of the message for every message.
Prerequisites:
You have set up an e-mail account with an ISP.
The incoming e-mail server uses the POP3 protocol.
You have set up the name of the incoming e-mail server and your personal registration
data (account name, password) using the Web configurator (
£
page 114).
New incoming e-mails are indicated by the
Ë
icon. The number of new e-mails is shown to
the right. If more than 99 e-mails have been received, the number will flash. If no more capac-
ity is available for e-mails, the e-mail icon will flash red. The maximum storage capacity is 5
MB.
The phone checks at regular intervals whether new e-mails have been received. You can set
the time intervals via the Web configurator in multiple stages between 15 minutes and 24
hours (
£
page 142).
You can also access your inbox via the Message Centre (
£
page 67). The
E
key flashes if
there are new e-mails on the incoming e-mail server.
q
Scroll through the list to the
required call record.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key to delete
the call record.
Call Records
Play Delete
Brown, Tim
14.05.10, 16:27 - 16:30
V
Miller, Peter
12.05.10, 10:14 - 10:18
Black, Susan
10.05.10, 18:20 - 18:22
James
§§1§§Account1
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
65
Managing messages
Opening the incoming e-mail list
The phone will connect to the incoming e-mail server. A list of e-mail messages that are
stored there is displayed.
New messages are identified by the
Ë
icon; ones that have already been read are followed
by
Â
. Messages are classed as new if they have been received since the last time the incom-
ing e-mail list was accessed.
If a new e-mail is selected: The number of the selected new message and the total number
of new messages is displayed in the top right corner.
If an old e-mail is selected: The number of the selected old message and the total number of
old messages is displayed in the top right corner.
Via the display menu:
¢
Messages
¢
E-mail
Via the Message Centre:
E
¢
E-mail
The e-mail messages are displayed in chrono-
logical order, from the most recent through
to the oldest, along with the following infor-
mation:
u
Name/e-mail address of the sender (single
line; shortened if necessary)
u
Date and time (prerequisite for correct
details: the sender and recipient are in the
same time zone)
u
Subject
Note
Many e-mail providers activate spam protection measures by default. E-mail messages
classified as spam are stored in a separate folder and are therefore not shown in the
incoming e-mail list.
Some e-mail providers allow you to deactivate spam protection or show spam e-mails in
the incoming e-mail list.
Other e-mail providers may send a message to the inbox when a new spam e-mail is
received. This is to inform you that a suspected spam e-mail has been received.
The date and sender of this mail are repeatedly updated, so that it is always displayed as
a new message.
E-mail
View Delete
ben.milller@company.com
15.05.10, 10:20
Invitation
1/2
Ë
Black, Susan
19/05/10, 11:11
Meeting minutes
Ë
carlos.alvarez@spec...
Â
66
Managing messages
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
If establishing a connection fails
If a connection to the incoming e-mail server cannot be established, the No Connection mes-
sage is displayed.
This may have the following causes:
Incorrect entry of incoming e-mail server name (
£
page 114)
Temporary problems with the incoming e-mail server (server is down or not connected
to the Internet).
¤
Check settings.
¤
Try again later.
Reading e-mail messages
Deleting e-mail messages
The incoming e-mail list is opened (
£
page 65).
q
Select an e-mail entry.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key to delete the e-mail.
Or
If you have opened the e-mail message to read it.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key to delete the e-mail.
The e-mail is deleted from the phone's e-mail list. To delete e-mails from the server as well,
use the Web configurator (
£
page 142).
In the opened incoming e-mail list:
§§View§§
Press the display key to display e-
mail.
The first 10 KB of an e-mail is downloaded to
the phone. The message header, the mes-
sage and the name of any attachments are
displayed. The attachments are not trans-
ferred. If the e-mail is longer than 10 KB, the
message cannot be transferred in full and
may not be readable.
Notes
u
If the e-mail message contains more than just text, a message to this effect is displayed.
The subject of the message is then displayed.
u
If the subject and/or the message text are formatted in HTML, they are converted into
text format.
E-mail
Back Delete
From:
1/22
Subject:
Mail Text ...
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
67
Managing messages
Accessing messages via the Message Centre
The Message Centre gives you quick access to newly-received messages at the press of a key.
It provides centralised access to the following messages:
u
Voice mails (
£
page 61)
u
Missed calls (
£
page 46)
u
E-mails (
£
page 64)
u
Missed alarms (
£
page 69)
The message key
E
flashes if a new entry is received for one of these message types. A new
entry is classed as anything that has been received since the corresponding list was last
opened.
You use the Web configurator to specify which message types can be accessed via the Mes-
sage Centre (
£
page 144).
Opening the Message Centre
You open the Message Centre with the
E
key.
To open the list:
q
Scroll to the required message type.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to display the list.
The list shows the message types together
with the relevant icon:
Ã
Network mailbox (with relevant VoIP
account)
Missed calls
Ë
E-mails
n
Missed alarms
For each message type the number of old
and new messages is displayed.
Note
The Gigaset T500 PRO and Gigaset T300 PRO phone systems do not distinguish between
old and new missed calls. If your phone is connected to this type of phone system, this
information is not available.
Messages & Calls
Back OK
Voice Mail
2 new messages
Ã
0 new calls
E-mail
Ë
Missed Calls
10 old calls
8 old messages
68
Managing the calendar and alarms
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Managing the calendar and alarms
Alarms include anniversaries (e.g., birthdays). Birthdays that are entered in the directory
(
£
page 53) are automatically recorded in the calendar.
Managing the calendar
You open the calendar via the display menu. You can also display the calendar permanently
on the idle display (
£
page 86).
Opening the calendar
¢
Organizer
¢
Calendar
The current month is displayed.
Special days are highlighted.
White box:
Orange box:
Highlighted orange:
Current date
Selected date
Date with assigned
alarm
If one or more alarms are scheduled on the
same day, you can display these:
p
Navigate to the required date.
§§View§§
Press the display key.
Note: Select a date and press the
q
key on
the upper or lower edge of the calendar to
scroll to the previous or following month.
The alarms for the selected day are displayed
with an icon.
R
Birthday/anniversary: Name as it
appears in the directory entry
and age based on the date of
birth
Deleting an entry:
q
Select an entry.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key.
May 2010
View Options
Mo Tu SuSaFrThWe
1 2
3
4 5 6 7 8
9
10
11 12 13 14 15
16
17
18 19 20 21 22
23
24
25 26 27 28 29
30
31
17
18
19
20
21
22
18
16.05.2010
Back Delete
Mary
12 years
R
Susan
35 years
R
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
69
Managing the calendar and alarms
Displaying alarms
An alarm occurs when the date of an anniversary is reached. Alarms are shown on the idle dis-
play.
§§Off§§
Press the display key to switch the display off. The display returns to idle status.
§§Call§§
Press the display key to call the participant.
If you do not react to a displayed alarm, the alarm is added to the list of missed alarms
(
£
page 69).
Missed alarms
Alarms that you do not react to are added to the missed alarms list. You can access this via the
display menu or via the Message Centre (
£
page 67).
Missed alarms are displayed in chronological order, from the most recent through to the old-
est, and are accompanied by an icon.
R
Birthday/anniversary: Name as it appears in the directory entry and age based on the
date of birth
The number and status of the entry is displayed in the top right-hand corner.
Missed alarms are classed as new if they have been entered since the last time the list was
accessed.
Deleting an entry:
q
Select an entry.
§§Delete§§
Press the display key.
When you close the list, the status of all entries is set to "old", regardless of whether you
viewed the entry or not.
Displaying a birthday
The date and age based on the date of birth
are displayed.
The display starts at 09:00 on the specified
anniversary.
Via the display menu:
¢
Organizer
¢
Missed Alarms
Via the Message Centre:
D
¢
Missed Alarms
Call Off
Tim Brown
17.05.2010, 48 years
ØR
70
Managing the calendar and alarms
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Alarm clock function
You can set a signal to wake you at a certain time.
If the alarm clock is activated, the
·
icon appears. The wake-up time is shown on the right-
hand side (
£
page 4).
The wake-up call will sound at the specified time either Monday to Friday or daily.
You can manage the alarm clock function via the display menu:
¢
Organizer
¢
Alarm Clock
Activating/deactivating the alarm clock function
A wake-up call is signalled on the display and
the selected ringer also rings for 60 seconds.
§§Off§§
Press the display key to deacti-
vate the wake-up call.
r
Select On or Off.
Time:
~
Enter the time for the wake-up call in
four-digit format, e.g., 0715 for 07:15
(24-hour format) or 07:15 AM (12-hour
format).
Occurrence:
r
Specify on which days the wake-up call
should be activated:
Monday-Friday or Daily.
Off
07:30
Ø·
Alarm Clock
Back Save
Activation:
On
Time:
06:00
Occurrence:
Daily
U
T
Volume:
V
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
71
Managing the calendar and alarms
Setting the volume and ringer
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save your settings.
Volume:
r
Set the volume for the wake-up call at
one of ten levels. The current setting is
displayed graphically.
Signal:
r
Set the signal.
All available ringers can be selected.
The selected ringer is played back.
You can load individual ringers to your phone
(
£
page 103).
Alarm Clock
Back Save
Occurrence:
Daily
U
T
Volume:
W
Signal:
Sound1
72
Using Internet services
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using Internet services
The telephone's Information Centre provides a range of services (info services) with which
information can be retrieved from the Internet and Web devices in your network and dis-
played. The Info Centre offers access to the following information:
Prerequisite: The info services function has been activated in the Web configurator and the
required info services have been set up (
£
page 145).
Open the Information Centre using the
D
key.
News Fetch information from RSS feeds (
£
page 73).
Weather reports Display local weather reports (
£
page 74).
Internet radio Listen to Internet radio (
£
page 75).
Webcam Display images from webcams (
£
page 75).
Map Display the location of call participants or any other addresses in a
map (
£
page 78).
Door interphone Display images from intercom video cameras (
£
page 76).
Note
Info services of the News, Weather and Webcam types can also be used as a
screensaver(
£
page 89).
¤
Select between displaying News,
Weather, Internet Radio, Webcam, Map
and Door Interphone.
q
Select the required display.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the
selection.
Info Services
Back OK
News
Weather
Internet Radio
Webcam
Map
Door Interphone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
73
Using Internet services
News
The News menu offers a list of RSS feeds that were selected in the Web configurator. RSS feeds
are information that is provided in a standardised format for simple and structured publica-
tion on websites (e.g., news sites, blogs, audio/video logs etc.) and that you normally have to
subscribe to.
News is divided into a range of topics: Headlines, Entertainment , Computer, Sports, Busi-
ness, Sci/Tech. The RSS feed library of a provider is assigned to each topic in the Web config-
urator (max. ten RSS feeds per topic). You normally have to subscribe to RSS feeds with a pro-
vider.
The sub-topics defined are displayed, depending on your selection.
q
Select the required sub-topic.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
The screen of the selected info service is displayed.
Example: Headlines
If the full line cannot be displayed, the text scrolls through from right to left.
The display is updated every 10 seconds.
q
Select the required headlines.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the selection.
The headline for the news item is displayed.
q
Scroll through the news item.
r
Scroll to the next or previous news item.
q
Select the required topic.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the
selection.
News
Back OK
Headlines
Entertainment
Computer
Sports
Business
Sci/Tech
74
Using Internet services
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Weather reports
Listening to Internet radio
Prerequisite: The Internet Radio function has been activated in the Web configurator and a list
of radio stations has been selected (
£
page 148).
Activating Internet radio
In addition to access via the Information Centre, you can also activate Internet radio via the
display menu:
¢
Additional Features
¢
Internet Radio
The device automatically tries to connect to the last Internet radio station that was set.
You can display Weather Reports for a maxi-
mum of ten locations. You specify the city in
the Web configurator (
£
page 147).
The weather reports for the next three days
are displayed.
r
Scroll to the next or previous weather
report.
If you use the weather reports as a screen-
saver and multiple locations have been
defined, the display cycles through them
every 10 seconds.
If a connection is established, you can listen
to the station's current programme. Any
information supplied by the station, such as
the name of the station and the artist and title
of the song currently being played, are shown
in the display.
An error message is displayed if a connection
could not be established. You can then select
a different station.
The broadcast is ended if a call comes in or if
you make a call.
Back
22.07 23.07 24.07
New York
partly cloudy
Temp
Sun hours
Precipitation
Wind
19/21°C
6.5
40%
NE 4mph
Internet Radio
Back Stations
Radio 56.4
Artist
Title
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
75
Using Internet services
Selecting a station
Displaying webcam images
You can show images from webcams on the display.
Images from all configured webcams can be accessed via the Info Centre. You can use a web-
cam as a display for the screensaver (
£
page 89).
Prerequisite: Info services have been activated in the Web configurator and the URL(s) of the
webcam(s) has/have been entered (
£
page 147).
D
Press the button to open the Info Centre.
q
Select Webcam and press
§OK§§
to confirm.
q
Select the required webcam and press
§OK§§
to confirm.
§§Stations§§
Press the display key.
All of the configured Internet
radio stations are displayed.
q
Select the required station.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the selection.
§§Update§§
Press the display key to load the image.
§§End§§
Press the display key to end display,
after which you can select another
webcam.
Note
An incoming call ends display.
Stations
Back OK
Radio 56.4
V
Oldies
Pop and Rock
Classics
Radio 1598
Radio Art and Culture
.1234 Radio
Webcam 1
Update End
76
Using Internet services
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / messages.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Door interphone
You can operate multiple door interphones using your telephone. If one of the door inter-
phones is rung, the display shows a picture from the connected video camera (
£
page 77).
Pictures from all configured door interphone video cameras can be accessed via the Info Cen-
tre. These pictures can also be accessed when the interphone has not been rung.
Prerequisite: The door interphone cameras have been registered on the Web configurator
(
£
page 149).
D
Press the button to open the Info Centre.
q
Select Door Interphone and press
§OK§§
to confirm.
q
Select the required camera and press
§OK§§
to confirm.
The display shows the webcam (
£
page 75).
Update§
Press the display key to load the image.
§End§
Press the display key to end display, after which you can select another video
camera.
Closing info services
The info services display automatically closes if an event occurs, e.g., an incoming call.
If an info service has been activated as a screensaver, you can close the display by pressing
the
I
key.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / additional_features.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
77
Operating door interphones
Operating door interphones
You can operate one or more door interphones with video surveillance using the phone. The
pictures from the camera(s) are shown on the phone's display.
Prerequisite: The door interphone must have been configured on the Web configurator
(
£
page 149) or the Gigaset phone system.
If someone rings the door interphone, this is displayed as an incoming call on the phone. The
image from the video camera is also shown.
Switching the ringer off
§§Silence§§
Press the display key to switch
off the ringer. You can then
decide whether or not to open
the door.
Ending the connection to the door
interphone
§§Reject§§
Press the display key or end key
l
to reject the request.
Conduct a call over the door interphone
c
Pick up the receiver to talk with
the person at the door. Alterna-
tively you can conduct the call
using the speaker key
A
or the
headset
B
.
§Open Door§§
Press the display key to operate
the door opener.
§§End§§
Press the display key to end the
call without opening the door.
Note
u
If you are carrying out a telephone call at the same time, the ring at the door is signalled
by Call Waiting (
£
page 39). You can either reject the call or accept and open the door.
When the connection to the door interphone is ended, the previous connection is
restored. Toggling between calls is not possible.
u
An incoming call is signalled as a Call Waiting if you are already connected to the door
interphone. If you accept the call the connection to the door interphone is ended.
Reject Silence
Door Interphone
ØÙ
EndOpen Door
78
Displaying maps
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / additional_features.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Displaying maps
You can display a map section on the telephone display in a variety of situations, for example,
to show you the location of a call participant or to search for an address.
Prerequisite: The display of maps has been activated in the Web configurator:
Settings
¢
System
¢
Display (
£
page 160).
The zoom factor and the type of display (Roadmap, Terrain or Hybrid) can be changed in the
Web configurator.
On an incoming call or during a call
Prerequisite: The address of the caller must be known, either in the entry in the local direc-
tory or through automatic search in an online directory.
In the directory
Directory entries for which an address has been entered have the additional entry Show in
map in the options menu.
The location of the other caller is shown on
the map on an incoming call or during a call.
q
Scroll through the list to the
required name.
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
s
Select Show in map and press
§§OK§§
to confirm.
The map is displayed. The display covers the
entire surface of the screen.
Connection
11:45
Info
ä1234567890
Brown, Tim
via
§§1§§
IP1
W
09:13
Adam
Back OK
V
New Entry
Edit Entry
Show in map
Change Default No.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / additional_features.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
79
Displaying maps
As info service
You can search for an address of choice. This function is available through the Information
Centre.
D
Open the Information Centre.
s
Select Map and press
§§OK§§
to confirm.
¤
Enter a location in the Address field. You
must the international name here, e.g.
Munich for München.
§§Search§§
Press the display key to start the
search.
For instructions on entering text see
£
page 23.
If the location is found, the map is shown with
the location marker.
p
Press right, left, up or down on the nav-
igation key to move the section.
w
Slide your finger on the edge of the
navigation key right or left to enlarge
or shrink the section (zoom). Right:
shrink section (zoom in); left: enlarge
section.
§Satellite§§
Press the display key to switch
between map view and satellite view.
Note
An incoming call ends display.
Map
Search
Address
Û
Abc
Satellite
Back
80
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Configuring basic settings
Your telephone is preconfigured, but you can change the settings to suit your individual
requirements.
Info
The first time you access the Settings menu, you will receive information about important
settings for your phone.
¢
Settings
¢
Info
Setting the date and time
The date and time must be set accurately to record the correct time for incoming calls and use
the alarm clock and calendar.
You use the display menu to manually set the date and time:
¢
Settings
¢
Date / Time
How the date and time are displayed depends on which time and date format is set
(
£
page 161).
The following settings are displayed:
u
SW Version
u
Country Version
u
MAC Address LAN
u
u
IP Address
Please note
The address of a time server on the Internet or the local network is saved on your phone.
The date and time are taken from this time server provided that the phone is connected
to the network and synchronisation with the time server is activated. Manual settings are
overwritten in this case.
The settings for the time server should be made via the Web configurator (
£
page 158).
Info
Back
SW Version:
_02.00.00
Country Version:
German
MAC Address LAN:
7C2F8008F459
IP Address:
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
81
Configuring basic settings
Date:
~
Enter the day, month and year in eight-digit format, e.g., for 14 January 2010:
Time:
~
Enter the time in four-digit format, e.g., 0715 for 07:15.
Time display for this setting in 24-hour format: 07:15
Time display for this setting in 12-hour format: 07:15 AM
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save your settings.
Setting the ringer
You can set the volume and melody of the ringer. You can select two different volume levels
for time-based operations and completely silence the ringer for anonymous calls.
Setting the volume
The volume of the ringer for incoming calls can be adjusted over ten levels.
Setting the volume in idle status
¢
Settings
¢
Audio Settings
¢
Ringer Settings
¢
Volume
For the date format dd.mm.yyyy14012010
For the date format mm.dd.yyyy01142010
r
Select the required volume.
The volume is adjusted immedi-
ately. You can test the setting by
playing back the ringer with the
melody set at the selected vol-
ume level.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the
settings.
Volume
Back Save
Calls
U
T
Time Control
Off
82
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Setting alternative volumes for particular times
You can set a different volume for a particular time period, e.g., during the night.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the settings.
Setting the volume while the phone is ringing
You can adjust the volume while the phone is ringing using the
H
key. Each time you press
the key, the volume will increase or decrease by one level. The last setting is saved.
Setting a melody
You can choose various ringer settings, melodies or sounds from the resource directory
(
£
page 103) and configure different ringer settings for each VoIP account.
¢
Settings
¢
Audio Settings
¢
Ringer Settings
¢
Melodies
s
Select Time Control and activate the
function using the
v
navigation key.
s
Select Alternative Ringer Volume.
r
Select the required volume.
~
In the From and To fields enter the time
period (start and finish) for the alterna-
tive ringer volume in four-digit format,
e.g., 2215 for 22:15 and 0600 for 06:00.
Each configured VoIP account is listed along
with its current melody. The default setting
for All Calls is Individual, i.e., the relevant set-
ting is applied to each account. If you select a
melody for All Calls, this applies to all
accounts.
q
Select the VoIP account you want to set
the ringer for or select All Calls.
§§List§§
Press the display key to display the
melodies.
Volume
Back Save
Alternative Ringer Volume
U
T
From:
To:
00:00
06:00
Melodies
List Save
Mobile:
Sound2
U
T
W
All Calls:
Individual
Account12:
Sound1
Sound1
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
83
Configuring basic settings
§§Save§§
Press the display to save the settings if you have created the settings for all
accounts.
Silencing the ringer for anonymous calls
You can silence the ringer for external calls where the caller has withheld their number.
¢
Settings
¢
Audio Settings
¢
Ringer Settings
All of the melodies from the resource direc-
tory are displayed.
At the top right-hand corner of the screen,
you can see which VoIP account you are edit-
ing or All Calls.
q
Choose the melody.
The selected melody is played at the
set volume.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the
selection.
If the function is activated, the Anon. Call
Silencing entry is marked with
³
. The
phone will then not ring if an anonymous call
is received. The call is still shown on the dis-
play.
§§Change§§
Activate/deactivate the function
with the display key.
The change is made immediately.
Melodies
Back
OK
Sound1
Sound2
Sound3
Sound4
Sound5
Spung6
Sound7
Account12
Ringer Settings
Back Change
Anon. Call Silencing
Volume
Time Control
³
Melodies
84
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Activating/deactivating advisory tones
Your phone uses advisory tones to tell you about different activities and statuses. The follow-
ing advisory tones can be activated/deactivated independently of each other:
u
Key Tones Each key press is signalled acoustically.
u
Confirmations After completing an entry/setting and when a new entry appears in the
network mailbox or call list, when you make an incorrect entry or when you scroll to the
top of a menu.
¢
Settings
¢
Audio Settings
¢
Advisory Tones
Setting the display
When setting the display, you can configure the idle display, screensaver and backlight.
Display in idle status
The idle display shows the time zones, an analogue or digital clock, the calendar, a picture or
pictures in the form of a slide show. Default setting: Time Zone.
¢
Settings
¢
Display
¢
Idle Display
Key Tones:
r
Select On or Off.
Confirmations:
r
Select On or Off.
§Save§
Press the display key to save the
setting.
r
Select from Time Zones, Clock, Calen-
dar, Slide Show and Pictures.
The options you have chosen will then be
available at the bottom of the display.
s
Move the cursor to Selection.
Advisory Tones
Back Save
Key Tones
U
T
Confirmations:
On
On
Idle Display
Back Save
Application
U
T
Selection:
Time Zones
GMT: Edinburgh, Dublin, London
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
85
Configuring basic settings
Setting the time zone
When setting the Time Zones, a map of the
world showing the time zones appears on the
screen. The current setting is highlighted.
You can change the time zone here or via the
Web configurator (
£
page 158).
Changing the time zone:
§§List§§
Press the display key to display the list
of all time zones.
q
Select the required time zone.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to apply the cho-
sen time zone.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the set-
tings.
Calls Select Line
10:12
17.05.2010
Idle Display
List Save
Application:
Time Zone
Selection:
GMT: Edinburgh, Dublin, London
U
T
86
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Clock
Calendar
If you select Clock, a clock showing the cur-
rent time is displayed.
By default, the time is set by a time server
(
£
page 158). You can deactivate the time
server and set the time manually
(
£
page 80).
Choose between an analogue and a digital
time display.
Selection:
r
Choose between Analog Clock
and Digital Clock.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the
settings.
If you select Calendar, a calendar showing
the current month is displayed. You can find
out more about the calendar function in the
Managing the calendar section on page 68.
No further settings are required.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the
settings.
Calls Select Line
17.05.2010
Idle Display
Back Save
Application:
Clock
Selection:
Analog Clock
U
T
27.05.2010
10:12
Calls Select Line
Mo Tu SuSaFrThWe
1 2
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23
24 25 26 27 28 29 30
31
17
18
19
20
21
22
18
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
87
Configuring basic settings
Slide show
If you choose Slide Show you select a series
of pictures to be displayed one after the
other at 10-second intervals.
If you prefer to use your own pictures, you
will need to add them to your phone's
resource directory (
£
page 102).
Selecting pictures:
The names of the pictures chosen for the
slide show are listed.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to select
different pictures.
A list containing all of the pictures from the
resource directory is displayed.
A
³
appears next to the pictures selected
for the slide show.
q
Select the required picture.
§§Change§§
Press the display key to select a
picture for the slide show or to
remove the tick.
§§Back§§
Press the display key when you
have selected all the pictures.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the
settings.
Calls Select Line
10:12
17.05.2010
Idle Display
Change Save
Application:
Slide Show
Picture Selection:
<Picture1, Picture2, Picture3, ...>
Select Pictures
Back Change
Picture2
Picture3
Picture4
³
´
´
88
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Pictures
If you choose Pictures you can select a pic-
ture to be shown on the display.
If you want to use your own picture, you must
save it beforehand in the resource directory
(
£
page 102).
Selecting a picture:
All of the pictures are loaded from the
resource directory. The first picture is dis-
played.
r
Scroll through the list.
§§View§§
Press the display key to enlarge
the picture. Return to normal
view by pressing
§§OK§§
.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the
settings.
Calls Select Line
10:12
17.05.2010
Idle Display
View Save
Application:
Pictures
Selection:
Picture1
UT
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
89
Configuring basic settings
Activating a screensaver
If a screensaver is activated, this replaces the idle display (
£
page 84). The screensaver
appears if the phone is not used for a period of 15 seconds. Similar to the idle display, the
screensaver can consist of an analogue or digital clock, the calendar, a picture or a series of
pictures in slide show format. However, unlike the idle display, the screensaver covers the
whole of the screen.
You can also set the screensaver to display information from an info service (RSS feed,
weather information).
¢
Settings
¢
Display
¢
Screensaver
The settings for configuring the screensaver are identical to those used to configure the idle
display:
Clock
£
page 86, Calendar
£
page 86, Slide Show
£
page 87, Pictures
£
page 88.
Displaying the info service as a screensaver
You can display specific information that is available on the Internet or your network as a
screensaver. The following categories are available.
u
News RSS feeds
u
Weather reports
u
Images from webcams
u
Your own services, provided as an XML page.
Prerequisites:
u
You choose Info Services as the Screensaver for your phone.
u
The display of info services is activated via the Web configurator; an info service is selected
for the screensaver (
£
page 148).
Setting the screensaver:
r
Select from No Screensaver, Clock,
Calendar, Slide Show, Pictures and
Info Services.
The options you have chosen will then be
available at the bottom of the display.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save your
settings.
Please note
Use the
D
key to call up the Information Centre (
£
page 67) for a list of all the info ser-
vices available.
Screensaver
Back Save
Application:
No Screensaver
UT
90
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Selecting an info service
r
Select Info Services as the
screensaver.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save the
settings.
If no info service is available, the Analog Clock
will be displayed as the screensaver instead.
Please note
The display of info services may be blocked via the Web configurator (
£
page 145).
Screensaver
Back Save
Application:
Info Services
UT
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
91
Configuring basic settings
Setting the backlight
The brightness of the backlight for the display can be set to one of seven levels or you can
specify a time period during which the backlight is deactivated completely, e.g., at night.
If the display backlight is deactivated, it can be reactivated by pressing any key or by an
incoming call. In this situation, pressing the key has no further function.
Prerequisite: The date and time have already been set.
¢
Settings
¢
Display
¢
Backlight
Brightness
r
Select the required brightness level
from 1 to 7. Your setting is activated
immediately so that you can check it
and correct it if necessary.
Time Control
r
Select On or Off.
The following fields only appear when Time
Control = On.
Display off from
~
Enter the time at which the dis-
play backlight should be deacti-
vated, in four-digit format.
Display off until
~
Enter the time at which the dis-
play backlight should be reacti-
vated, in four-digit format.
§§Save§§
Press the display key to save your
settings.
Backlight
Back Save
Brightness
UT
Time Control:
5
On
Display off from:
V
Backlight
Back Save
Time Control:
5
On
Display off from:
W
00:00
Display off until:
00:00
92
Configuring basic settings
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / settings.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Setting the language
You can view the display texts in different languages.
¢
Settings
¢
Language
Resetting the device to the default settings
If you give your device to a third party or change workstation, you can delete your individual
settings and data by resetting the device to the factory settings. All system settings are reset
to the default settings. User-specific data is deleted.
This means that network configurations, VoIP accounts, directories, call lists, data in the
resource directory and all of your individual settings are deleted or reset to the factory set-
tings.
You need the administrator password before you can use this function (
£
page 159).
¢
Settings
¢
Reset
~
Enter the administrator password.
§§OK§§
Press the display key. The password is verified.
If the password is correct, you must now confirm the operation.
§§Yes§§
Press the display key. The device is reset to the factory settings.
The current language is indicated by a
w
.
q
Select the required language.
§§Select§§
Press the display key to activate
the selected language.
The language is changed.
Language
Back
Select
Deutsch
English
Francais
Italiano
Espanol
Portugues
Nederlands
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
93
Configuring settings for the local network
Configuring settings for the local network
All of the settings for connecting your phone to the local network must be correct to enable
communication with other devices in the network and phone calls via the Internet.
Your phone can be connected to the local network using an Ethernet cable . When you first
set up the phone, the device will automatically try to connect to the local network
(
£
page 19).
This will work, if:
You have connected the device to the network using an Ethernet cable (
£
page 14)
The gateway automatically assigns network IP addresses using DHCP
The network uses IP protocol version 4 (IPv4).
The phone is then automatically assigned an IP address and is connected to the local net-
work. You can then continue configuring your phone via the Web configurator at a PC
(
£
page 105).
If the network connection is not established automatically, you will initially not be able to
access the Web configurator. If this is the case, you will have to establish the network connec-
tion manually via the display menu:
u
If your device is assigned a static IP address, your network administrator must tell you the
IP address of your device. You then assign this address to your phone (
£
page 94).
u
If your network uses IPv6, you have to set your phone to Internet protocol version 6 (IPv6)
(
£
page 96). The connection is established if the address is assigned automatically. If a
static IP address should be assigned to your phone, your network administrator must
inform you of this. You then assign this to your phone.
Whether you configure the network settings when you initially set up the phone (
£
page 19)
or you start configuration via the display menu – the settings are the same.
Warning
The connection may be interrupted if you change the configuration for a functioning net-
work connection. You will then no longer be able to access the local network or the Web
configurator and you will no longer be able to make calls via the Internet.
94
Configuring settings for the local network
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
LAN settings
You start network configuration via the display menu:
¢
Settings
¢
Connectivity
¢
Local Network
Selecting the network type
IPv4 configuration
Please note:
To get access to network configuration you need to enter the administrator password. The
default setting is admin.
Network Type
r
Select the IP protocol that is used in
your network (IPv4 or IPv6).
You may be asked to configure additional set-
tings depending on your selection.
IP Address Type
r
Select Dynamic if your device receives
the IP address via a DHCP server.
Select Static if your device receives a
fixed IP address.
If the Dynamic setting is selected, all further
settings are automatically configured. They
are displayed here and cannot be changed.
Local Network
Back Save
Network Type:
IPv4
Activated Network:
LAN
IP Address Type:
Static
U
T
IP Address:
V
Local Network
Back Save
IP Address Type:
Dynamic
U
T
IP Address:
V
192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Standard Gateway:
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
95
Configuring settings for the local network
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises four individual groups of numbers with decimal values from 0 to
255 that are separated by a dot, e.g., 192.168.2.1.
Please note:
The IP address must be included in the address block used by the router for the local
network. The valid address block is defined by the router's IP address and the subnet
mask (see example).
The IP address must be unique in the local network, which means that it must not be
used by another device connected to the router.
The static IP address must not belong to the address block that is reserved for the
router's DHCP server.
Check the settings on the router or ask your network administrator.
Example:
Subnet Mask:
The subnet mask specifies how many parts of an IP address the network prefix must com-
prise.
For example, 255.255.255.0 means that the first three parts of the IP address must be the
same for all devices in the network, while the last part is specific to each device. In subnet
mask 255.255.0.0, only the first two parts are reserved for the network prefix. Enter the
subnet mask that is used by your network.
Standard Gateway
Enter the IP address for the standard gateway through which the local network is con-
nected to the Internet. This is generally the local (private) IP address for your router (e.g.,
192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this information to be able to access the Internet.
If you have selected Static as the address
type, you must now create the following set-
tings:
IP Address
–Subnet Mask
Standard Gateway
Preferred DNS Server and
–Alternate DNS Server
Router IP address: 192.168.2.1
Network subnet mask 255.255.255.0
DHCP server address block 192.168.2.101 – 192.168.2.255
Possible IP addresses for the phone 192.168.2.2 – 192.168.2.100
Local Network
Back Save
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
V
192.168.1.100
Subnet Mask:
255.255.255.0
Standard Gateway:
96
Configuring settings for the local network
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Preferred DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows you
to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the
DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations where
the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
¤
Once all the settings are complete, press the display key
§§Save§§
to save the configuration
settings.
IPv6 configuration
IP Address Type:
r
Select Automatic Scan if your device
receives the IP address via a DHCP
server. Select Static if your device
receives a fixed IP address.
If the Automatic Scan setting is selected, all
further settings are automatically configured.
They are displayed here and cannot be
changed.
If you have selected Static as the address
type, you must now create the following set-
tings:
IP Address
Prefix Length and
Preferred DNS Server
–Alternate DNS Server
Ask your network administrator for your net-
work settings.
Local Network
Back Save
IP Address Type:
Automatic Scan
IP Address:
V
2001:b021:198:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87
Prefix Length:
64
Preferred DNS Server:
Local Network
Back Save
IP Address Type:
Static
IP Address:
V
2001:b021:198:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87
Prefix Length:
64
Preferred DNS Server:
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
97
Configuring settings for the local network
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises 128 bits and is represented by eight blocks of hexadecimal fig-
ures from 0 to FFFFFF that are separated by a colon, e.g., 2001:b021:189:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87.
The IP address comprises a prefix and an interface identifier. The length of the prefix (usu-
ally 64 bits) is determined by the Prefix Length value.
Prefix Length
The prefix length stipulates how many bits of the IP address are used for the network pre-
fix. Enter the prefix length that is used in your network.
Preferred DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows you
to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the
DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server:
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations where
the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
¤
Once all the settings are complete, press the display key
§§Save§§
to save the configuration
settings.
VLAN tagging
A local network can be divided into logical subnetworks, so-called VLANs (Virtual Local Area
Network, standard IEEE 802.1Q). Multiple VLANs share a physical network and its compo-
nents, e.g., switches. Data packets of a VLAN are not forwarded to another VLAN. VLANs are
often used to separate the data traffic of different services (Internet telephony, Internet TV, ...)
and to define different priorities for the data traffic.
If you are operating your phone in a VLAN, enter the identifier of your VLAN (VLAN tag) here.
You get this from your network operator.
Warning
If you enter an incorrect value here, you must reset the phone to its default settings
(
£
page 92). After this you must re-establish phone access to the local network.
98
Configuring settings for the local network
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Data packets from VLANs can be prioritised. The priority determines whether the data traffic
from a VLAN is given preferential treatment by the network components. You can define the
priority for voice and data separately. In the case of a local network with a lot of data traffic,
you can achieve better-quality phone connections by giving a high priority to voice data.
¤
On the menus Voice Priority (LAN Port) and Data Priority (LAN Port), select the priorities
you want for the transfer of voice and data.
Range of values and their Class of Service assignments (according to IEEE 802.1p):
¤
Once all the settings are complete, press the display key
§§Save§§
to save the configuration
settings.
r
Select Ye s for Use VLAN Tagging.
~
Enter the VLAN Identifier (LAN Port).
Value range: 1 – 4094
0 No priority (Best Effort)
1 Background services, e.g., News Ticker (Background)
2Not defined
3 General data services (Excellent Effort)
4 Control services, e.g., routing (Controlled Load)
5Video
6 Voice data (Voice)
7 Top priority for network control software (Network Control)
Please note
Further options for optimising the voice quality are available in the Web configurator
under QoS settings (Quality of Service)
£
page 125.
Local Network
Back Save
Use VLAN Tagging
V
Yes
T
VLAN Identifier (LAN Port):
100
Voice Priority (LAN Port):
1
Data Priority (LAN Port):
W
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / connectivity.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
99
Connecting a headset
Connecting a headset
You can connect a headset via the RJ9 connector of your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO.
¤
Connect the cable for the headset to the RJ9 connector on the phone.
§§Options§§
Press display key.
q
Select Delete Entry.
100
Using the resource directory
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / resources.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Using the resource directory
The resource directory in your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO provides a memory in which you can
manage pictures and sounds. The Resource Directory contains
u
Sounds that you can use as ringers
u
Pictures that you can use as screensavers
u
Pictures that you can use as caller pictures in directory entries (Vcard pictures).
The Resource Directory supports the following file formats:
Your phone contains a variety of default sounds and pictures. You can play the available
sounds and view the pictures.
You can download other pictures and ringers from the Web configurator into the Resource
Directory (
£
page 166).
Type Format Size
Sounds mp3 Max. 2 MB
Pictures
–Pictures
–Vcard pictures (CLIP)
JPG
320 x 240 pixels
64 x 78 pixels
Max. 250 KB
Max. 250 KB
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / resources.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
101
Using the resource directory
Managing screensavers
Your phone includes a selection of pictures that can be used as screensavers. You can load
your own pictures into the resource directory via the Web configurator .
You can view, rename and delete pictures in the Resource Directory.
To use one or more pictures (slide show) as a screensaver, you must activate the screensaver
function and select the required picture or set up a slide show (
£
page 89).
Open the list of available pictures via the display menu:
¢
Additional Features
¢
Resource Directory
¢
Screensavers
Deleting a picture:
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select Delete.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action. The selected picture is deleted.
You can only delete pictures you have imported yourself, not default pictures.
If you delete a picture that is used as a screensaver, the screensaver function is deactivated.
The pictures are alphabetically sorted by
name.
Displaying a picture in large scale:
q
Select the picture.
§§§View§§
Press the display key.
Renaming a picture:
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the Rename action.
§§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the action.
~
Enter the name.
§§Save§§
Press the display key.
Screensavers
View Options
Picture1
Picture2
Picture3
102
Using the resource directory
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / resources.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Managing caller pictures
Any pictures that you want to use as caller pictures must be saved in the Resource Directory.
You can add your own pictures to the resource directory using the Web configurator.
A caller picture forms part of the directory entry (vCard). To transfer vCards, the CLIP feature
must be enabled by the caller and recipient.
You can view, rename and delete pictures in the Resource Directory.
You assign a caller picture from the Resource Directory to an entry in your directory
£
page 52.
You open the list of available caller pictures via the display menu:
¢
Additional Features
¢
Resource Directory
¢
Caller Pictures
If you change the name of a picture that is used in a directory entry, it will also be renamed in
the directory entry.
Deleting a picture:
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select Delete.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action. The selected picture is deleted.
If you delete a picture that is used in a directory entry, it will also be removed from the direc-
tory entry.
The pictures are alphabetically sorted by
name.
Displaying a picture in large scale:
q
Select the picture.
§§§View§§
Press the display key.
Renaming a picture:
§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the Rename action.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the action.
~
Enter the name.
§§Save§§
Press the display key.
Caller Pictures
View Options
brown_tim
black_susan
forster_fred
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / resources.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
103
Using the resource directory
Managing sounds
The Resource Directory includes a range of sounds that you can use as ringers. You can load
your own ringers via the Web configurator (
£
page 166)
You can play, rename and delete sounds in the Resource Directory.
Sounds can be assigned as ringers via the display menu (
£
page 81).
You open the list of available sounds via the display menu:
¢
Additional Features
¢
Resource Directory
¢
Sounds
Deleting a sound:
§§Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select Delete.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm the action. The selected sound is deleted.
You can only delete sounds you have imported yourself, not default sounds.
If you delete a sound that is being used as a ringer, default sound Sound1 is assigned to all
the affected accounts.
The sounds are alphabetically sorted by
name.
Playing sounds:
q
Select a sound.
The sound is played after a few moments.
Renaming a sound:
Options§§
Press the display key.
q
Select the Rename action.
§§OK§§
Press the display key to confirm
the action.
~
Enter the name.
§§Save§§
Press the display key.
Sounds
Back
Options
Sound1
Sound2
Sound3
Sound4
Sound5
Sound6
Sound7
104
Using the resource directory
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / resources.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Checking the capacity of the Resource Directory
You can display the available capacity in the Resource Directory.
¢
Additional Features
¢
Resource Directory
¢
Capacity
The available capacity is displayed as a per-
centage.
Capacity
Back
Available: 50 %
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
105
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
The Web configurator provides you with a user interface that you can use to configure your
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO on the PC. The setup assistant makes it easier for you to set your device
up for the first time.
Prerequisite: Your phone is connected to the local network.
In most cases, this connection is established automatically as soon as you connect the device
using a network cable (
£
page 14). If this is not the case, you establish the connection to the
local network via the display menu when you set the device up for the first time (
£
page 18).
Starting the Web configurator
You will need the IP address for your phone. You will find this via the display menu, in the
LAN settings for the device:
¢
Settings
¢
Connectivity
¢
Local Network (
£
page 94).
Accessing the Web configurator:
¤
Launch the Internet browser on your PC.
¤
Enter the IP address in the browser's address field:
Example:
The login screen appears.
¤
Select the appropriate language.
¤
Select the required user type and enter the corresponding password:
¤
Click on OK.
The Web configurator will now start.
The following describes all functions of the Web configurator. Please be aware that not all
functions are available in User mode.
Note
The IP address can sometimes change, depending on the settings of the DHCP server in
your network.
User If you want to operate your phone on the PC.
Default password: user
Administrator If you want to configure your phone.
Default password: admin
Note
For your security, you should change the default passwords (
£
page 159).
106
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Launching the Web configurator
In administrator mode: If you have not set up a VoIP account yet, the setup assistant screen
will appear (
£
page 108).
If you have already set up a VoIP connection, select the function that you wish to use.
u
Use the Settings tab to set or change individual functions on your phone (
£
page 116).
u
Open the Status tab to obtain information about the status of your phone (
£
page 170).
Understanding the Web configurator menu tree
The following illustration shows the Web configurator menu tree.
Only a limited number of functions are available in user mode. These are marked with an
asterisk (*) in the following table.
Configuration Assistant
£
page 108
Settings * Network and Connec-
tions
LAN Settings
£
page 117
Server and Phone Systems
£
page 123
QoS Settings
£
page 125
VoIP Settings
£
page 126
Security Settings
£
page 127
OpenVPN Settings
£
page 128
Telephony * Connections
£
page 132
Audio
£
page 136
Ring Tones *
£
page 137
Call Divert *
£
page 138
Local Settings
£
page 138
Dialling Plans
£
page 140
Do Not Disturb *
£
page 141
Call Live Recording
£
page 141
Voice Mail Services
£
page 142
Messaging E-mail
£
page 142
MWI Light
£
page 144
Services IP Info Services
£
page 145
Internet Radio
£
page 148
Door Interphone
£
page 148
Online Directory
£
page 150
LDAP
£
page 151
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
107
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Function Keys *
£
page 154
System * Date and Time
£
page 158
Security *
£
page 159
Display *
£
page 160
Local Contacts *
£
page 163
All Calls *
£
page 165
Upload Tones and Pictures *
£
page 166
Reboot and Reset
£
page 167
Save and Restore
£
page 167
Firmware Update
£
page 168
Status Device
£
page 170
System Log
£
page 170
SIP Protocol
£
page 171
PCAP Logging
£
page 171
Storage Allocation
£
page 171
108
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Running the setup assistant
This assistant will help you to configure your phone. It will guide you through all the impor-
tant steps involved in:
Configuring your phone connections
Configuring your e-mail account
Afterwards, you will be able to change all the settings that you create using the setup assis-
tant in the Settings tab (
£
page 116).
When you have completed the fields on a screen, click on Next >.
If you want to go back a screen to change something, click on < Back. Use Cancel to close the
setup assistant.
¤
Make sure that you have the registration data for your VoIP provider to hand before you
begin the configuration.
¤
Click on Next > to begin the configuration.
Configuring a VoIP account
You have the following options for configuring a VoIP account:
Auto Configuration Configuration is completed without you needing to enter any
information. Your VoIP provider must permit this for your
account.
Profile Download Your provider's default settings are used. You only have to
enter your personal registration data.
Manual configuration You configure all the settings yourself.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
109
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Automatic configuration
¤
Select Yes if your provider permits automatic configuration for your account and click on
Next >.
The automatic configuration is now carried out. This may take a few minutes. Once the pro-
cess is complete, the
£
Completing configuration screen will appear.
Configuration via provider profile
If your provider does not enable automatic configuration, your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO offers a
range of provider profiles that make it easy for you to configure your VoIP accounts. Each pro-
file contains the most important configuration settings for the provider concerned.
¤
Click on No if automatic configuration is not permitted and then click on Next >.
¤
The Auto Configuration screen will guide you through the rest of the process. Click on
Next >.
The Profile Download screen will appear.
¤
Click on Next > to start the configuration.
¤
Select your Country and click on Next >.
¤
Select your Provider and click on Next >.
The most important configuration settings will now be loaded.
The next step is for you to enter
£
Personal provider data.
110
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Configuration without provider profile
If your provider is not on the list, select Other Provider.
¤
Select the required settings for your VoIP account on the following screens. Your provider
will supply you with this data.
General provider data
Domain
Specify the last part of your SIP address (URI).
Example: Example: For the SIP address 987654321@provider.de you would enter pro-
vider.de.
Proxy Server Address
The SIP proxy is your VoIP provider's gateway server. Enter the IP address or the DNS name
of your SIP proxy server.
Example: myprovider.com.
Proxy Server Port
Enter the number of the communication port that the SIP proxy uses to send and receive
signalling data (SIP port). Port 5060 is used by most VoIP providers.
Registration Server
Enter the IP address or the DNS name of your registrar server. The registrar is needed when
the phone is registered. It assigns your SIP address (username@domain) to the public IP
address/port number your phone uses to log in. With most VoIP providers, the registrar
server is identical to the SIP server.
Example: reg.myprovider.de.
Registration Server Port
Enter the communication port used on the registrar. Port 5060 is used in most cases.
Registration Refresh Time [sec]
Enter the time intervals at which the phone should repeat the registration with the VoIP
server (SIP proxy) (a request will be sent to establish a session). The repeat is required so
that the phone's entry in the tables of the SIP proxy is retained and the phone can there-
fore be reached. The repeat will be carried out for all activated VoIP phone numbers. The
default is 120 seconds.
If you enter 0 seconds, the registration will not be repeated periodically.
¤
Click on Next >.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
111
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Network provider data
The phone needs to know its public address in order to receive caller voice data.
The SIP protocol recognises the following options:
u
The phone requests the public address from a STUN server on the Internet (Simple Trans-
versal of UDP over NAT). STUN can only be used with asymmetric NATs and non-blocking
firewalls.
u
The phone does not direct the connection request to the SIP proxy but to an outbound
proxy on the Internet that supplies the data packets along with the public address.
The STUN server and outbound proxy are used alternately to work around the NAT/firewall in
the router/gateway.
¤
Enter the required data for the STUN server or outbound proxy:
STUN enabled
Select Yes if you want your phone to use STUN as soon as it is used on a router with asym-
metric NAT.
STUN Server Address
Enter the DNS name or the IP address of the STUN server on the Internet. If you have
selected Ye s in the STUN enabled field, then you must complete this field.
STUN Server Port
Enter the number of the communication port on the STUN server.
The default port is 3478.
STUN Refresh Time [sec]
Enter the time intervals (seconds) at which the phone should repeat the registration with
the STUN server. The repeat is required so that the phone's entry in the tables of the STUN
server is retained. The repeat will be carried out for all activated VoIP phone numbers. Ask
your VoIP provider for the STUN refresh time if necessary. Default setting: 30 seconds.
NAT Refresh Time [sec]
Specify the intervals at which you want the phone to update its entry in the NAT routing
table. Specify an interval in seconds that is a little shorter than the NAT session timeout. As
a rule you should not change the default value for the NAT update. Default setting: 20 sec-
onds.
Outbound Proxy Mode
Specify when the outbound proxy should be used.
If you leave the Outbound Server Address field empty, the phone does not respond to the
selected mode and operates as if Never were selected.
Always All signalling and voice data sent by the phone is sent to the outbound
proxy.
Automati-
cally
Data sent by the phone is only sent to the outbound proxy when the phone
is connected to a router with symmetric NAT or a blocking firewall. If the
phone is behind an asymmetric NAT, the STUN server is used. If you have set
STUN enabled to No, or if you have not entered a STUN server, the out-
bound proxy will be used in all cases.
Never The outbound proxy is not used.
112
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Outbound Server Address
Enter the DNS name or the IP address of your provider's outbound proxy. With many pro-
viders, the outbound proxy is identical to the SIP proxy.
Outbound Proxy Port
Enter the number of the communication port used by the outbound proxy. The default
port is 5060.
Automatic Negotiation of DTMF Transmission
DTMF signalling is required, for example, for querying and controlling certain network
mailboxes via digit codes or for remote operation of the local answering machine. Select
whether the setting should be made automatically. If you select No, you must determine
the setting for the DTMF transfer yourself.
Send Settings for DTMF Transmission
To send DTMF signals via VoIP, you must define how the key codes are to be converted to
DTMF signals and sent:
Ask your VoIP provider which type of DTMF transmission it supports.
¤
Click on Next >.
Audio As audible information in the voice channel, i.e., it is not known which key
has been pressed.
RFC 2833 As a value (= key pressed) in an RTP packet.
SIP Info As an "SIP Info" message.
The value (= key pressed) is sent as an SIP data packet.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
113
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Personal provider data
In both cases of manual configuration, with and without a provider profile, you now enter the
personal registration data that you have received from your VoIP provider.
¤
Enter the following data:
Authentication Name
Authentication Password
–Username
Display Name
You can also enter a name of your choice for this phone connection. This is advisable if you
use multiple VoIP accounts.
¤
Enter a Connection Name.
¤
Click on Next > to finish configuring the VoIP account.
Completing configuration
The data for the configured VoIP account is displayed.
¤
To change the settings, click on < Back.
¤
If you want to configure another VoIP account, check the relevant box. In this case, the
Web configurator will return to the start screen when you press Next > (
¢
Configuring
a VoIP account).
¤
Click on Finish to end the setup assistant.
¤
Click on Next > to
Configure another VoIP account
Configure an e-mail account
114
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Configuring an e-mail account
Your phone can notify you when new e-mail messages have been received on your incoming
e-mail server. You can connect to the incoming e-mail server and display the sender, date/
time of receipt, subject and body of the message for every e-mail message in the incoming e-
mail list.
Prerequisites:
You have set up an e-mail account with an ISP.
The incoming e-mail server uses the POP3 protocol.
¤
Select Yes if you want to configure an e-mail account and click on Next >.
¤
Enter the data for your e-mail account:
Authentication Name
Authentication Password
POP3 Server
You will have received this data from your provider when you set up your e-mail account.
¤
Select how often you want new e-mails to be retrieved. You can choose from values
between Every 15 minutes and Once per day.
¤
Select whether new e-mails should be displayed via the Message Centre key
E
on your
phone (
£
page 67).
¤
Select whether e-mails should be transmitted via a Security Connection (SSL). Indicate
the Server Port for the secure connection.
In this case you can only access the message via the display menu, not via the Message
Centre key (
£
page 64).
¤
Click on Next >.
Note
You can configure additional settings for e-mail messages on the Settings tab
(
£
page 142).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
115
Web configurator – configuring the phone on a PC
Closing the assistant
You have now successfully configured your phone using the Web configurator. The following
data is displayed once again:
The number of VoIP accounts configured
The name of the default account for outgoing calls
E-mail notification configured: Ye s or No
¤
Click on Finish to close the assistant and apply the settings.
¤
Click on < Back if you want to make changes to your settings.
116
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
The Settings menu of the Web configurator allows you to change settings that you have
already made using the phone's display menu or the assistant, or that were the default set-
tings when the phone was delivered. You also have further configuration options.
The menu offers the following functions:
u
Network and Connections (
£
page 117)
Configure the settings for the local network, server and PABX, set up other VoIP accounts
and create the security settings.
You can also set up your phone as an OpenVPN client in a virtual private network here.
u
Telephony (
£
page 132)
Edit your configured VoIP accounts, optimise the quality of the voice connections, config-
ure phone functions such as call divert and dialling plans and set up blacklists and voice
mail services.
u
Messaging (
£
page 142)
Configure settings for receiving e-mail and configure the Message Centre (MWI) for your
device.
u
Services (
£
page 145)
Select info services and Internet radio stations for your info centre, set up a door inter-
phone and configure settings for using directories.
u
Function Keys (
£
page 154)
Assign frequently used functions to the programmable keys on your phone.
u
System (
£
page 158)
Change the basic settings on your phone, e.g., date/time or display settings. You can also
restart the system or add new firmware.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
117
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Network and connectors
All of the settings for connecting your phone to the local network must be correct to enable
communication with other devices in the network and phone calls via the Internet.
If you use the Web configurator, your phone is already connected to the local network. You
can use the Network and Connections menu to change and extend these settings. You can
also configure additional VoIP accounts and create settings for phone connections:
u
LAN settings (
£
page 117)
u
Server and phone systems (
£
page 123)
u
VoIP settings (
£
page 126)
u
Security settings (
£
page 127)
u
OpenVPN settings (
£
page 128)
LAN settings
Settings
¢
Network and Connections
¢
LAN Settings
Assigning the network address
Network Type
¤
Select the IP protocol that is used in your network (IPv4 or IPv6).
You may be asked to configure additional settings depending on your selection.
Warning
If an error occurs when you are changing the LAN settings, the PC connection to the
phone may be cancelled and you will no longer have access to the Web configurator.
If this happens, you must re-establish phone access to the local network via the display
menu (
£
page 94).
118
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
IPv4 configuration
¤
Select Dynamic if your device receives the IP address via a DHCP server.
¤
Select Static if your device receives a fixed IP address.
If the Dynamic setting is selected, all further settings are configured automatically. They are
displayed and cannot be changed.
If you selected Static as the address type, you must configure the following settings:
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises four individual groups of numbers with decimal values from 0 to
255 that are separated by a dot, e.g., 192.168.2.1.
The following should be observed:
The IP address must be included in the address block used by the router/gateway for
the local network. The valid address block is defined by the IP address for the router/
gateway and the subnet mask (see example).
The IP address must be unique across the network, which means that it must not be
used by another device connected to the router/gateway.
The fixed IP address must not belong to the address block that is reserved for the DHCP
server for the router/gateway.
Check the settings on the router or ask your network administrator.
Example:
Router IP address: 192.168.2.1
Network subnet mask 255.255.255.0
DHCP server address block 192.168.2.101 – 192.168.2.255
Possible IP addresses for the phone 192.168.2.2 – 192.168.2.100
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
119
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask specifies how many parts of an IP address the network prefix must com-
prise.
For example, 255.255.255.0 means that the first three parts of an IP address must be the
same for all devices in the network, while the last part is specific to each device. In subnet
mask 255.255.0.0, only the first two parts are reserved for the network prefix. Enter the
subnet mask that is used by your network.
Standard Gateway
Enter the IP address for the standard gateway through which the local network is con-
nected to the Internet. This is generally the local (private) IP address for your router/gate-
way (e.g., 192.168.2.1). Your phone requires this information to be able to access the Inter-
net.
Preferred DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows you
to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the
DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations where
the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
IPv6 configuration
IP Address Type
¤
Select Auto Configuration if your device receives the IP address via a DHCP server.
¤
Select Static if your device receives a fixed IP address.
If the Auto Configuration setting is selected, all further settings are configured automatically.
They are displayed here and cannot be changed.
If you selected Static as the address type, you must configure the following settings:
120
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
IP Address
Enter an IP address for your phone. This IP address allows your phone to be reached by
other subscribers in your local network (e.g., PC).
The IP address comprises 128 bits and is represented by eight blocks of hexadecimal fig-
ures from 0 to FFFFFF that are separated by a colon, e.g., 2001:b021:189:0:205:5dff:fe6b:87.
The IP address comprises a prefix and an interface identifier. The length of the prefix (usu-
ally 64 bits) is determined by the Prefix Length value.
Prefix Length
The prefix length stipulates how many bits of the IP address are used for the network pre-
fix. Enter the prefix length that is used in your network.
Preferred DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the preferred DNS server. DNS (Domain Name System) allows you
to assign public IP addresses to symbolic names. The DNS server is required to convert the
DNS name into the IP address when a connection is being established to a server.
You can specify the IP address for your router/gateway here. This forwards address
requests from the phone to its DNS server.
There is no default setting for a DNS server.
Alternate DNS Server
Enter the IP address for the alternate DNS server that should be used in situations where
the preferred DNS server cannot be reached.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
121
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
VLAN tagging
A local network can be divided into logical subnetworks known as VLANs (VLAN = Virtual
Local Area Network, Standard IEEE 802.1Q). Multiple VLANs share a physical network and its
components, e.g., switches. Data packets from a VLAN are not forwarded to another VLAN.
VLANs are often used to separate the data traffic of different services (Internet telephony,
Internet TV etc.) and to define different priorities for the data traffic.
You can operate your phone and a PC connected to the PC port on your phone in two differ-
ent VLANs. In this case, you enter the VLAN identifiers (VLAN tags) for your VLAN. Your net-
work operator will supply you with this data.
¤
Select one of the following options for Use VLAN Tagging:
Warning
If you operate the PC in a different VLAN from the phone, you will no longer have direct
access to the Web configurator of the phone from the PC.
No If you are not using a VLAN (default).
LAN Port only If you are operating the phone and PC in the same VLAN.
LAN and PC Port If you are operating the phone and PC in different VLANs.
122
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
¤
Enter the VLAN identifier for your virtual network in the VLAN Identifier (1..4094) field.
When selecting LAN and PC Port, enter the different VLAN identifiers under VLAN LAN
Port and VLAN PC Port.
Value range: 1 – 4094
¤
Select the required priorities for voice and data transmission for the LAN port from the
Voice Priority and Data Priority menus.
¤
If you selected LAN and PC Port, select the VLAN Priority for the transmission of PC data
as well.
Prioritising VLANs
Data packets from VLANs can be prioritised. The priority determines whether the data traffic
from a VLAN is given preferential treatment by the network components. You can define the
priority for voice and data separately. In the case of a local network with a lot of data traffic,
you can achieve better quality phone connections by giving a high priority to voice data.
Using a high priority for data services you can achieve better quality for displaying info ser-
vices such as webcam images or maps.
Range of values and assignment of values to service classes (according to IEEE 802.1p):
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the LAN Settings screen.
Warning
If you enter the wrong value for VLAN Identifier (1..4094), you will need to restore the
phone to the default settings (
£
page 92). You will then need to reinstate the
phone's access to the local network (
£
page 94).
0 No priority (Best Effort)
1 Background services, e.g., news ticker (Background)
2Not defined
3 General data services (Excellent Effort)
4 Control services, e.g., routing (Controlled Load)
5Video
6 Voice data (Voice)
7 Top priority for network control software (Network Control)
Note
Further options for optimising the voice quality are available under QoS settings
(Quality of Service)
£
page 125.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
123
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Server and phone systems
If you operate a separate HTTP server or a phone system in your local network, use this screen
to configure access to your phone.
Settings
¢
Network and Connections
¢
Server and Phone Systems
Configure HTTP proxy
¤
Select whether you want to enable a separate proxy server in the network for your phone.
¤
If Ye s, enter the IP address for the proxy server in the Proxy Server Address field.
¤
The default setting for the Proxy Server Port is 80. Change this if your server uses a differ-
ent port.
Own HTTP server settings
¤
If you operate your own HTTP server, enter the communication data.
HTTP Port
Enter the number for the port to be used for communication by the HTTP server. The
default setting is 80.
HTTPS Port
Enter the number for the port to be used for secure connections by the HTTP server. The
default setting is 443.
HTTP Connection Type
Select which connections can be established:
Automatic logout [min]
Enter the time (in minutes) after which an HTTP connection should automatically end if
no entries are made.
Phone Systems
If your phone is connected to a phone system, select what type of phone system it is.
Connected with phone system (sample selection)
HTTP Unsecured connection
HTTPS Secure connection
HTTP + HTTPS Both secure and unsecured connections
Standard The phone is connected to any phone system.
Gigaset T500/300 The phone is connected to a Gigaset T500 PRO or Gigaset T300
PRO.
HiPath
...
124
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Call Manager
If your phone is connected to a Gigaset phone system:
¤
Select if you would like to automatically accept calls transferred by the phone system's call
manager. You have the following options:
–via Headset
via Handsfree or
not at all (No)
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the Server and Phone Systems screen.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
125
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
QoS settings (Quality of Service)
On this screen you can optimise the voice quality of your IP telephone.
The voice quality depends on the priority of the voice data in the IP network. Prioritising the
VoIP data packets is done using the QoS protocol DiffServ (Differentiated Services). DiffServ
defines a number of classes for the quality of service and, within these classes, various priority
levels for which specific prioritisation procedures are defined.
You can specify different QoS values for SIP and RTP packets. SIP packets (Session Initiation
Protocol) contain the signalling data, while RTP (Real-time Transport Protocol) is used
for the voice transfer.
Settings
¢
Network and Connections
¢
QoS Settings
¤
Enter your chosen QoS values in the SIP ToS/Diffserv (0..63) and RTP ToS/Diffserv (0..63)
fields. Value range: 0 - 63.
Common values for VoIP (default setting):
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the QoS Settings screen.
SIP 34 High service class for fast switching of the data flow
(Expedited Flow)
RTP 46 Highest service class for fast forwarding of data packets (Expedited For-
warding)
Warning
Do not change these values without consulting your network operator first. A higher value
does not necessarily mean a higher priority. The value determines the service class, not
the priority. The prioritisation procedure used in each case meets the requirements of this
class and is not necessarily suitable for transferring voice data.
Detailed information on the Diffserv protocol can be found in RFC 2474
and RFC 3168.
126
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
VoIP settings
On this screen you configure the ports for establishing VoIP connections.
Settings
¢
Network and Connections
¢
VoIP Settings
"Listen ports" for VoIP connections
¤
Select the ports on which your phone expects incoming VoIP connections.
Use random ports
¤
Select Ye s if the phone should use any available ports for the SIP port and RTP port instead
of fixed ports.
The use of random ports is advisable if you want multiple phones to be operated on the
same router/gateway with NAT. The phones must then use different ports so that the NAT
for the router/gateway is only able to forward incoming calls and voice data to one (the
intended) phone.
¤
If you click on No, the phone uses the ports specified in SIP port and RTP port.
SIP port
Specify the local communication port that the phone should use to send and receive sig-
nalling data. Specify a number between 1024 and 49152. The default port number for SIP
signalling is 5060.
RTP port
Specify the local communication port that the phone should use to receive voice data.
Enter an even number between 1024 and 49152. The port number must not be the same
as the port number in the SIP port field. If you enter an odd number, the next lowest even
number will be selected automatically (e.g., if you enter 5003, then 5002 is set automati-
cally). The default port number for voice transmission is 5004.
ICE enabled
Choose whether or not to use ICE (Interactive Connectivity Establishment). ICE is similar to
STUN (
£
page 111) a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) method for overcoming NAT fire-
walls.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the VoIP Settings screen.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
127
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Security settings
This screen is where you create security settings for your phone.
Settings
¢
Network and Connections
¢
Security Settings
Remote management
¤
Select whether you want to Allow access from other networks to the WEB configurator
(Ye s) or not (No).
If you permit Remote Management, this increases the risk of unauthorised access to your
device settings.
¤
Select the network protocol to be used for the communication:
TLS (Transport Level Security)
UDP (User Datagram Protocol
UDP (Transmission Control Protocol)
Security settings
On this screen you can download server certificates onto your phone, delete downloaded
certificates and specify how invalid certificates should be handled.
Server certificates allow a server to be digitally identified via SSL (Secure Sockets Layer). Oper-
ating a server with SSL requires a server certificate both for one-way authentication (server to
the client) and for two-way authentication (between client and server). A server certificate
has to be downloaded onto your device so that the device can carry out authentication.
The Server Certificates and CA Certificates lists contain all downloaded certificates.
¤
Select a certificate from one of the lists.
¤
Click on Remove to delete the certificate from the list.
¤
Click on Details to display information about the certificate.
Import a local certificate
In order for a certificate to be downloaded to your phone, it must be available in your net-
work.
¤
Click on Browse to search for the file on your PC or in your network. Select the required file.
¤
Click on Upload to download the file onto the device.
Invalid Certificates
The list contains all invalid certificates.
¤
Select a certificate from the list.
¤
Click on Accept to accept the certificate anyway.
¤
Click on Reject to reject the certificate.
Note
The connection to the handset may be interrupted when transferring or removing a cer-
tificate.
128
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Secure Real Time Protocol (SRTP)
The Secure Real-Time Transport Protocol (SRTP) allows you to encrypt voice data transmitted
using the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP).
¤
Activate or deactivate the Secure Real Time Protocol (SRTP).
¤
Select whether you want to Accept Non-SRTP Call or not. If this function is activated, you
also accept incoming calls from a number that does not use SRTP.
¤
In the Pre-Shared Key for SRTP field, enter the password for the encryption/authentica-
tion via SRTP.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the Security Settings screen.
OpenVPN settings
You can use OpenVPN to set up a virtual private network (VPN) to conduct secure communi-
cation over an encrypted connection. The security protocols are based on the OpenSSL pro-
tocols SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) and TLS (Transport Layer Security). OpenVPN creates a VPN
tunnel in which remote access to devices and resources of the private network is only possi-
ble for authorised devices. Communication between devices in the VPN only takes place
within this tunnel. Additional functions, such as STUN for bypassing NAT, for example, are not
required.
You can configure your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO as an OpenVPN client.
Prerequisite: An OpenVPN network has been set up. You will require the address of the Open-
VPN server and the authentication data (certificate and key).
Settings
¢
Network and Connections
¢
OpenVPN Settings
¤
If you would like to configure your phone as an OpenVPN client, select the On option next
to OpenVPN.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
129
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤
Select which virtual driver to use from the Interface list.
¤
Select the transport protocol to be used for communication from the Protocol list. The
options are TCP or UDP.
¤
Enter the IP address or domain name of the OpenVPN server in the Server Address field.
¤
Enter the port number for the tunnel in the Server Port field. The default setting is 1194.
¤
If the data of the virtual connection should be compressed, select the option Yes for LZO
compression.
Authentication
Authentication for devices that wish to join a VPN takes place using a certificate. The imple-
mentation of certificate-based authentication over the TLS protocol uses public/private key
pairs or X.509 certificates The server and user each possess an individual certificate (public/
private). The OpenVPN server only allows connections signed by a known certification
authority.
The following encryption protocols can also be used.
¤
Activate the required protocols:
Static Key (No X509 PKI)
Simple encryption protocol (one client, one server). A static key is generated from the IP
addresses of the server and client.
¤
Enter the IP address of the OpenVPN server in the Remote Tunnel IP field.
¤
Enter the IP address of your phone in the OpenVPN in the Local Tunnel IP field.
Hardening OpenVPN Security (tls-auth)
In this encryption protocol, all data packets are provided with an additional signature
(HMAC signature = Keyed-Hash Message Authentication Code).
TUN For a routed IP tunnel (routing mode). TUN simulates a point-to-point net-
work device and communicates via IP packets.
TAP For an Ethernet IP tunnel (bridge mode). TUN simulates an Ethernet device
and communicates via Ethernet frames.
130
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
DHCP relay
This function makes is possible for a DCHP sever on the other side of the VPN tunnel to assign
the IP address for the VPN to your telephone, rather than being assigned one from the IP
address pool of the OpenVPN server. This simplifies administration of IP addresses in complex
VPN structures, if, for example, all VPN networks need to belong to a single IP subnet.
¤
Activate the OpenVPN Server DHCP relay mode function if you wish to allow a DHCP
server on the other side of the VPN tunnel to assign the IP address for the VPN to your tel-
ephone.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings.
Loading certificate and key files
In the lower portion of the screen, you can load the certificates and keys for the OpenVPN
connection in your telephone or delete certificates and keys that have already been loaded.
You will require the CA Certificates, the Client Certificate and the Client Key.
You only require a key file for the Static Key or TA Key (using TLS authentification) if you are
using one of these security protocols.
Certificate and key files must be made available by the OpenVPN server administrator.
Loading a certificate
In order for a certificate to be downloaded to your phone, it must be available in your net-
work. The files can be uploaded individually or together in the form of a tar archive.
¤
Select the file you want to upload from the left-hand side, or select *.tar file if you have a
tar archive.
¤
Click on Browse to search for the file on your PC or in your network and select the relevant
file.
¤
Click on Upload to download the file onto the device.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
131
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
The certificates and keys loaded are shown.
¤
Click on Remove to remove a certificate or key from the list.
132
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Telephony
The Telepho ny menu provides the following setting options:
u
Connections (
£
page 132)
This is where you can configure your VoIP connections and establish new connections.
u
Voice quality (audio) (
£
page 136)
On this screen you can optimise the voice quality of your VoIP connections.
u
Ring Tones (
£
page 137)
This screen is only available in user mode. This is where you can configure the ringtones
for your connections (
£
page 137). In administrator mode, this setting can be found with
the configuration data for the connection (Telephony
¢
Connections).
u
Call divert (
£
page 138)
On this screen you can define options for call divert and activate or deactivate this func-
tion.
u
Dialling plans (
£
page 140)
The Dialling Plans screen is where you can define the use of area codes and VoIP connec-
tions for outgoing phone calls and enter the international and local area code for your
phone connection.
u
Do Not Disturb (DND) (
£
page 141)
You can use the blacklists to block incoming calls from selected numbers and also to block
all anonymous calls.
u
Call records (
£
page 141)
This is where you define where recordings of conversations are saved.
u
Voice mail services (
£
page 142)
On this screen you can configure your network mailbox.
Connections
You can establish up to 12 telephony connections (VoIP accounts) for your phone, plus a con-
nection for a mobile phone.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Connections
On this screen you can
Set up a new connection via Auto Configuration
See the status of the configured connections
Activate or deactivate individual connections
Define which of the connections are used by default for outgoing calls
Change the configuration of connections or establish new connections
Delete existing connections
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
133
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Setting up a new connection via Auto Configuration
¤
If you want to set up a new connection and your provider allows automatic configuration
for the account, click on Start.
When the process is complete, the connection is displayed in the list.
Connections for the Gigaset DE700 IP PRO
The following information is shown for each configured connection:
Activating/deactivating connections
Only activated connections can be used for Internet telephony.
¤
To use a configured connection, select Active.
Specifying a default line for outgoing calls
¤
Select Default Send Account for the connection that you want to use as the default line
for your phone calls. Only one can be selected.
Name/
Provider
Name or number of the VoIP connection / Name of the VoIP provider
Status Status of the connection. The following statuses are possible:
Registered The connection is registered with the provider.
Not registered The connection is not registered with the provider.
Registration failed An error occurred during registration.
Server not accessible The registrar server specified during configuration is
not available.
Disabled The connection is disabled.
134
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Establishing new connections or editing existing ones
¤
Click on Edit in the row of a configured connection to change its configuration.
¤
Click on Edit in a row without a configured connection to establish a new connection.
Only one connection can be configured at a time for mobile phones.
Configuring the connections
To do this you need the relevant information about your provider for Internet telephony.
¤
In the Connection Name or Number field enter a name of your choice or the phone num-
ber for this connection.
¤
Click on Start Profile Download to load a provider profile.
An assistant opens to guide you through the next steps.
¤
Select your Country and in the next step your Provider.
¤
If your provider is not in the list, select Other Provider.
¤
Click on Finish.
The selected provider profile is loaded.
Entering personal provider data
Now enter your personal login data that you received from your VoIP provider.
¤
Enter the following data:
Authentication Name
Authentication Password
–Username
Display Name
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
135
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Advanced Settings
You can find further parameters for configuring your VoIP connection under Advanced Set-
tings.
¤
Click on Show next to Advanced Settings.
For further information on configuration settings, please refer to the section Configuring a
VoIP account on page 108.
You can also configure the following settings here:
Counting missed and accepted calls
Missed and accepted calls for this VoIP account are recorded in the call lists for the phone if
this function is activated (
£
page 46).
¤
Open the Advanced Settings area.
¤
Select Yes for Missed/accepted calls count, if you wish to activate this function. Default
setting: No
Allowing or blocking Call Waiting
If you receive another incoming call during a call, this is indicated by Call Waiting by default.
For each connection, it is possible to set whether or not Call Waiting is permitted.
¤
Open the Advanced Settings area.
¤
Select No for Call Waiting if you wish to deactivate this function. Default setting: Yes
Setting the ring tone
You can set a ring tone for each connection.
¤
Open the Advanced Settings area.
¤
Select a Melody.
¤
Click on Test to play the selected melody.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings for this connection.
Deleting a connection
¤
Click on Delete connection to delete the displayed connection.
136
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Voice quality (audio)
The voice quality of your VoIP calls is determined by the codec used for the transmission. To
increase the quality, more data must be transmitted. Depending on the bandwidth of your
DSL connection, this can then lead to problems with the volume of data – especially if two
VoIP calls are made simultaneously – so that the transmission no longer takes place smoothly.
The following settings allow you to adjust your Gigaset to your individual DSL connection.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Audio
You can set the following parameters for the voice quality:
Time interval for RTP packets
¤
Select the interval for sending RTP packets (20 or 30 ms).
RTP (RTP = Real-Time Transport Protocol) is a protocol for the continuous transmission of
audiovisual data (streams) via IP-based networks.
Voice quality
¤
Select the voice quality that matches the bandwidth of your DSL connection.
Optimised for high bandwidth
Optimised for low bandwidth
Select Own Codec preference if you want to determine the codecs yourself.
Both parties involved in a phone connection (caller/sender and recipient) must use the same
voice codec. The voice codec is negotiated between the sender and the recipient when estab-
lishing a connection. You can influence the voice quality by selecting (bearing in mind the
bandwidth of your Internet connection) the voice codecs your phone is to use, and specifying
the order in which the codecs are to be suggested when a VoIP connection is established.
¤
Select the required codecs and define the sequence in which they should be used.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
137
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
The following voice codecs are supported by your phone:
Silence suppression
Silence suppression means that no data packets are sent during a pause in speaking. This
means a lower data volume but call participants may interpret it as an interruption to the con-
nection.
¤
Select No if you do not want silence suppression. Default setting: Yes
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
Ring Tones
This menu option is only available in user mode. In administrator mode this function can be
found under Settings
¢
Telepho ny
¢
Connections with the configuration data for the
connection (
£
page 135).
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Ring Tones
You can set a ring tone for each of your connections.
¤
Select a Melody.
¤
Click on Test to play the selected melody.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
G.722 The broadband voice codec G.722 works at the same bit rate as G.711 (64 kbit/s
per voice connection) but at a higher sampling rate (16 kHz) and therefore pro-
vides excellent sound quality.
G.711 a law/G.711 μ law
Excellent voice quality (comparable with ISDN). The required bandwidth is 64
kbit/s per voice connection.
G.726 Good voice quality (inferior to that with G.711 but better than with G.729). Your
phone supports G.726 with a transmission rate of
32 kbit/s per voice connection.
iLbc Average voice quality. The codec works with 30 ms or 20 ms blocks. The transmis-
sion rate is 13.33 kbit/s (30 ms blocks) or 15.2 kbit/s
(20 ms blocks).
G.729A Average voice quality. The necessary bandwidth is less than or equal to
8 kbit/s per voice connection.
Note
You can download further ring tones to your phone from the PC (
£
page 166).
138
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Call divert
For each configured VoIP account you can automatically forward incoming calls to another
phone number.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Call Divert
¤
Specify for the VoIP account when a call should be diverted.
¤
Enter the Phone Number to which calls are to be forwarded.
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
Local settings
On this screen, you provide details about the location of your phone. These are used to deter-
mine the international and local area dialling codes as well as country-specific tones (e.g.,
dialling tone or ringback tone).
Settings
¢
Telepho ny
¢
Local Settings
Off No call divert
All Calls Call divert for all incoming calls
No Answer Call divert if you do not answer the call
In the Waiting time for no answer (value range: 1 - 600 sec) field
enter the time in seconds after which call divert is to be activated.
When Busy Call divert if you are currently speaking to another participant.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
139
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Selecting the country
The time zone is determined automatically based on the country you select.
¤
Select the Country in which you are using your phone from the list.
Setting dialling codes
Depending on your country selection, the international and (if relevant for that country)
national dialling codes are entered in the Prefix and Code Number fields automatically.
If your country is not offered in the list of countries enter the dialling code yourself. Save the
complete area code (with international code) for the area in which you are using the phone.
In general, you must always dial the area code for VoIP calls – even for local calls. To avoid hav-
ing to dial the area code for local calls, your phone prefixes all VoIP calls in the local area with
the area code entered, i.e., all numbers that do not begin with 0 – even when dialling numbers
from the directory and other lists.
Exceptions: Numbers for which you have set dialling plans.
¤
Select Other Country from the end of the Country list.
¤
Enter the full prefix for the country in which you use your phone. Otherwise errors may
occur with phone connections or during data exchange (e.g., between a fixed line network
and a mobile network).
The prefix consists of the international prefix (International: Prefix and Code Number, e.g.
00 49 for Germany) and, if applicable, the prefix used for calls within the country (Local:
Prefix and Code Number, e.g. 0 for national long-distance calls in Germany).
Setting country-specific ringback and dialling tones
Tones, e.g. dialling tone, ringback tone, busy tone or call waiting tone, vary from one country
or region to another. You can choose from various tone groups for your phone.
The Tone Scheme is automatically determined on the basis of the country selected above.
You can change the setting.
¤
Select the country or region whose tone scheme should be used for your phone.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
140
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Dialling plans
You can use dialling plans to define which phone numbers should be called using which con-
figured VoIP account and whether an area code should be dialled first.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Dialling Plans
¤
Enter the Phone Number that the dialling plan is to apply to.
¤
Select Use Area Codes if you want to call this number with an area code.
¤
Select the connection that should be used to call this phone number.
¤
Enter a name for this dialling plan in the Comment field.
¤
Click on Add to add the rule to the list.
¤
Click on Delete to delete a rule from the list.
¤
Select Active if you want to activate the rule.
Access Code
The prefix is automatically added to numbers during dialling.
¤
Define when it should be used:
None (if you do not use an access code)
With numbers from Directory & Call lists
–With All
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the Dialling Plans screen.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
141
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Block individual phone numbers and/or all anonymous calls. You will then be unavailable for
these calls; your phone will not ring.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Do Not Disturb
¤
Select Yes to activate the Do Not Disturb function.
¤
Enter the Name and Phone Number for the call.
¤
Click on Add to save the entry to the do not disturb list.
¤
Click on Delete to delete an entry.
¤
Click on Delete all to delete all entries.
¤
Activate the Block anonymous caller option to block all anonymous calls.
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on this screen.
Call records
On this screen you define where call records should be saved.
You can start call records with the
F
key (
£
page 38). You can play recorded calls back via
the display menu (
£
page 63).
Call records of up to 30 minutes are saved on the phone's internal memory. If your network
has a server, you can also save call records there.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Call Live Recording
¤
Select where recorded calls should be saved:
at server: The recording is saved on the SIP server.
–at phone
¤
Click on Save to save the settings.
142
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Voice mail services
Some VoIP providers offer answer machines on the network – network mailboxes. These
accept incoming calls on the corresponding VoIP phone number. You can access voice mails
on the network mailbox via the display menu (
£
page 61) or the Message Centre
(
£
page 67)
To record all calls, set up a network mailbox for each of your VoIP accounts.
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Voice Mail Services
¤
Enter the Mailbox Number for the VoIP connection and activate the network mailbox.
¤
Click on Save to save the settings.
Messaging
The Messaging menu provides the following setting options:
u
E-mail
This is where you enter the data for your e-mail account so that you can receive your e-
mails on the phone.
u
MWI light (
£
page 144)
On this screen you can configure the behaviour of the Message Centre key (MWI = Mes-
sage Waiting Indication).
E-mail
Your phone will notify you when new e-mail messages have been received on your incoming
e-mail server. You can use your phone to connect to the incoming e-mail server and display
the sender, date/time of receipt, subject and body of the message for every e-mail message
in the incoming e-mail list.
Prerequisites:
u
You have set up an e-mail account with an ISP.
u
The incoming e-mail server uses the POP3 protocol.
u
You set up the name of the incoming e-mail server and your personal registration data
(account name, password).
If you have already entered the data in the setup assistant, you can change it here.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
143
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Settings
¢
Messaging
¢
E-mail
¤
Enter the data for your e-mail account that you received from your provider when you set
up your e-mail account:
Authentication Name
Authentication Password
POP3 Server
¤
Select from the Check for new e-mail list to specify how often you want new e-mails to be
retrieved. You can choose from various values between Every 15 minutes and Once per
day.
¤
Select whether e-mails that you delete on your phone (
£
page 66) should also be deleted
on the server. Default setting: They are only deleted on the phone.
¤
Select whether e-mails should be transmitted via a Security Connection (SSL). If Ye s, indi-
cate the Server Port for the secure connection.
In this case you can only access the message via the display menu, not via the Message
Centre key (
£
page 64).
¤
Click on Save to save the settings.
144
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
MWI light
The Message Centre allows you to access your voice mails, missed calls, e-mails and missed
alarms at the press of a key (
E
) (
£
page 67). This key flashes if a new message has been
received. You can switch the flashing on or off for every message type. (MWI = Message Wait-
ing Indication.)
Settings
¢
Messaging
¢
MWI Light
¤
Select the message type for which the receipt of a new message should be indicated by a
flashing Message Centre key.
Missed Calls
E-mail
–Voice Mail
Missed Alarms
¤
Select whether the MWI notification (the receipt of a new message) should also be indi-
cated by a beep (beep) or only by flashing (silent).
¤
Click on Save to save the settings.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
145
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Services
The Services menu offers the following functions:
u
Selecting info services and configuring for the screensaver
u
Activating internet radio and selecting stations (
£
page 148)
u
Setting up door interphones (
£
page 149)
u
Assigning an online directory (
£
page 150)
u
Assigning and configuring an LDAP directory (
£
page 151)
Info services
Information services from an info server can be shown on the phone's display. On this screen
you can activate this function and select the info services.
You can call up info services on the phone using the Info Centre key
D
(
£
page 72), or you
can use them as a screensaver (
£
page 89).
Settings
¢
Services
¢
IP Info Services
¤
Click on Ye s next to Activate Info Services to allow info services for your phone.
Selecting an info service for the screensaver
You can select a service from the News, Weather or Webcam category for the screensaver or
enter an XML site.
First, you should arrange the info services from the News, Weather and Webcam categories
at the bottom of the page.
If you wish to offer info services from an XML site, you must provide these in an XML file. The
structure of the XML file and the permitted XML tags for an XML site have been described in
a specification. You can find this at:
http://wiki.gigaset.com
.
If you have selected info services, set here which info service should be used as a screensaver.
¤
Select News, Weather, Webcam or XML site. Only one can be selected.
¤
Select the desired provider for news, the region for weather reports or the webcam from
the neighbouring drop-down lists. If you wish to display an XML page, enter the full file
path.
146
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
¤
Click on Save to save your setting.
Selecting an info service
News
You can enter the data for RSS feeds directly or search for RSS feeds in a specific category in a
specific country.
¤
First select the Country of the provider of the required RSS feed.
¤
Select the news category: Headlines, Entertainment, Computer, sen, Business, Science
and Technology.
All the RSS feeds that have been found for the selected country and category are shown
under Library of RSS feed providers.
¤
Click Add next to the desires RSS feed.
The services that you have already selected are listed under Current selection.
Note
The screensaver is activated via
u
the display menu Settings
¢
Display
¢
Screensaver (
£
page 89) or
u
the Web configurator menu Settings
¢
System
¢
Display (
£
page 160).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
147
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤
If you know the name and URL of a desired service, enter them in the empty fields and click
on Add.
¤
Click on Delete if you want to remove a news service from the current selection list.
¤
Click on Save to save your setting.
Selecting a weather service
Weather services that have already been configured are shown.
¤
Enter the name of a city or location and click on Search.
¤
Select your choice from the list of cities found and click on Add.
¤
Click on Delete to remove an entry from the list.
¤
Click on Save to save your setting.
Selecting a webcam
Webcams that have already been configured are shown.
¤
Enter a name and the URL for the webcam.
If access to the webcam is password protected, enter the access data in the following for-
mat:
http://USER:PASSWORD@IP-address-of-the-webcam/image.jpg
¤
Click on Add.
¤
Click on Delete to remove an entry from the list.
¤
Click on Save to save your setting.
148
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Internet radio
On this screen you can activate the Internet Radiofunction and select the stations for the
Internet radio.
Settings
¢
Services
¢
Internet Radio
¤
Click on Ye s next to Activate Internet Radio to allow Internet radio for your phone.
The stations listed here are available for selection if you access the Internet radio function in
the phone's display menu (
£
page 74). You can add new stations or delete existing ones
from the list.
¤
Enter the name and the Internet address (URL) for the required station in the empty fields
at the end of the list and click on Add.
¤
Click on Delete if you want to remove a station from the list.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the Internet Radio screen.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
149
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Door interphone
You can operate one or more door interphones with video surveillance using the phone. The
pictures from the camera(s) are shown on the phone's display (
£
page 77). Enter the data for
the door interphone on this page.
Settings
¢
Services
¢
Door Interphone
¤
Enter a name and the SIP ID for the camera.
¤
Enter the code for the door opener in the DTMF code field. This MFV code is required to
operate the door opener from the phone. The MFV code can be found in the description
of your door interphone.
¤
Enter the URL of the camera in the Camera (URL) field.
¤
Set how often the image should be refreshed in ms in the Reload Rate field. Minimum
time: 200 ms.
¤
Click on Add to add a camera to the list.
¤
Click on Delete if you want to remove a camera from the list.
¤
Click on Save to save your settings.
Note
The door interphone can also be set up for your phone using the Gigaset phone system.
If automatic configuration is permitted, configuration is carried out automatically on your
phone.
150
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Online directory
If you want to use an online directory (
£
page 57), select the provider on this screen which
supplies the directory on the Internet. Also specify which service you want to use.
Settings
¢
Services
¢
Online Directory
The available provider directories are displayed.
¤
Select the providers whose online directories you want to use by selecting the check boxes
under Select.
¤
If you select the Automatic look-up option, when a call comes in the online service auto-
matically looks up the name of the caller in the online directory. This function must be
available for the provider directory.
Configuring an additional provider
¤
To use the online services of another provider, enter the access data under Settings for
additional provider:
Provider Name
Server Address
–Username
–Password
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
151
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤
Activate the service(s) you wish to use:
White Pages
A public directory supplied on the Internet by the provider entered above
Ye llow Pages
Yellow pages supplied on the Internet by the provider entered above
You can activate one or both services.
¤
Enter a name for each of the selected services in the Name of directory field. This is the
name under which the directory will be displayed on your device (
£
page 57).
¤
Select whether you allow Automatic look-up.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the Online Directory screen.
LDAP directory
If your corporate network provides a directory via an LDAP server, you can access this on your
phone (LDAP = Lightweight Directory Access Protocol). You can set up the function on this
screen. You will need information about the configuration of the LDAP server to do this.
Settings
¢
Services
¢
LDAP
¤
Enter a name in the Name of directory. This is the name under which the directory will be
displayed on your device (
£
page 56).
¤
Enter all the data for your LDAP server and the directory.
Attributes
A range of attributes are defined in the LDAP database for a directory entry, e.g. surname, first
name, telephone number, address, company, etc. The quantity of all attributes, which can be
saved in one entry, is saved in the relevant LDAP server scheme. In order to be able to access
attributes or define search filters, you must know the attributes and their designation in the
LADP server. The majority of attribute designations are standardised, however specific attrib-
utes can also be defined.
152
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
The Gigaset DE700 IP PRO supports the following attributes:
LDAP Name Attributes
Defines which information should be delivered as the search result for the search by name,
e.g., surname only, surname and first name etc.
LDAP Number Attributes
Defines which telephone numbers are made available for an entry from the database, e.g.
the office number (telephoneNumber), the mobile number (mobile).
Filter
Using the filter, you can define criteria against which specific entries can be searched in the
LDAP database. One filter consists of one or more search criteria. A search criterion contains
the query for an LDAP attribute, e. g. sn=%. The percent symbol (%) is a placeholder for the
user entry.
LDAP Name Filter
The name filter decides which attribute is used for the search.
Example: (sn=%)
The percent symbol (%) is replaced by the name or part of the name entered by the user.
If a user enters the letter "A" for example, all entries in which the attribute sn begins with
"A" are searched for in the LDAP database . If the user then enters a "b", entries are searched
in which the sn attribute begins with "Ab".
Attribute name Name in the phone Meaning
cn sn Name with which the entry is listed
(cn = common name, sn = surname)
company or o Company Company name
telephoneNumber
k
Office number
mobile
l
Mobile number
homePhone
ä
Private number
mail E-mail E-mail address
postalAddress Street Street
postalCode ZIP Post code
I (location) City City or town
c (country) Country Country
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
153
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
LDAP Number Filter
The number filter stipulates the criteria for the automatic completion of telephone num-
bers.
Example: (|(telephoneNumber=%)(mobile=%))
The percent symbol (%) is then replaced by the part of the telephone number entered by
the user. When dialling, if a user enters the numbers "123" for example, all telephone num-
bers (office and mobile) that begin with "123" are searched for in the LDAP database. The
telephone number is completed with the addition of information from the database.
Multiple criteria can be connected using logical AND (&) and/or OR (|) operators. The logical
operators "&" and "|" are placed before the search criteria. The search criterion must be placed
in brackets and the whole expression must be terminated with a bracket again. AND and OR
operations can also be combined.
Examples:
Other parameters
LDAP Display Name
Defines how the search result is displayed on the handset. Here, you can enter combina-
tions of different name and number attributes and special characters. For the attribute
value to be shown for the required attribute, the attribute name must be preceded by a
percent symbol (%).
Example
The entry is shown on the handset as follows:
Black, Administrator; 0891234567890 / 09876543123 / 012398765432
AND operation: (& (givenName=%) (mail=%))
Searches for entries in which the first name and mail address begin with
the letters entered by the user.
OR operation: (| (cn=%) (sn=%))
Searches for entries in which the common name or surname begin with
the letters entered by the user.
Combined
operation:
(|(& (givenName=%) (mail=%))(& (sn=%) (mail=%)))
Searches for entries in which the first name and mail address or the sur-
name and mail address begin with the letters entered by the user.
Entry data on the LDAP server:
cn Administrator telphoneNumber 0891234567890
sn Black mobile 012398765432
. . . homePhone 09876543123
Attribute definition in the web UI:
LDAP Name Attributes cn sn
LDAP Number Attributes mobile telephoneNumber homePhone
LDAP Display Name %sn, %cn; %telephoneNumber / %homPhone / %mobile
154
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Server Address
IP address for the LDAP server in your network.
Server Port
Port number that is used to provide the LDAP service. Default setting: 389
LDAP Search Base
Range in the hierarchical LDAP database where the search begins. All areas have defined
designations.
Username
Access ID for the LDAP server.
Password
Password for the access ID to the LDAP server.
Max. Hits
Maximum number of search results to be displayed. Default setting: 50
¤
Select Ye s for LDAP lookup for incoming calls if a search should be made for a caller in the
LDAP directory instead of in the local directory.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on this screen.
Function keys
On this screen you can set up the key light, decide on the assignment of the directory key and
programme the function keys.
Settings
¢
Function Keys
Activating/deactivating the key light
¤
Select if and when the Key Light should be activated. This is the backlight for all keys, not
just the function keys.
Possible settings: Off, Always on, On in use
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
155
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Assigning the directory key
You can use the directory key
Z
(navigation key
s
) to open the local directory by default
(
£
page 50). You can change this setting.
¤
Select which directory you want to access with the Directory Key:
Local Directory (
£
page 50),
LDAP (company directory
£
page 56).
Programmable keys
Your Gigaset DE700 IP PRO allows you to assign frequently used functions or phone numbers
to up to 14 keys so that you can access them with one key press. You can increase the number
of function keys by connecting extension modules (
£
page 17). These are displayed under
Additional Program Keys.
All available function keys are shown with Key setting.
¤
Click on Edit to assign a number or function to a Key. The window for programming the
selected key will open.
¤
Select the required function from the Function Select list.
Line
Assigns a specific connection to the function key. You can use the key to make a call via
this connection or to answer an incoming call for this connection. The key flashes if a
call comes in and lights up if the line is busy.
¤
Select the required connection. All configured connections are displayed for you to
choose from (
£
page 132).
Shared Line
Assigns the VoIP account for a "split line" to the function key. This means that several
users share the same VoIP account. The key can be used to make a call via the shared
account or to answer an incoming call. It will be configured on all extensions for the
group. The keys will flash on all extensions if a call comes in and light up if the line on
any extension is busy.
This function is only available if your telephone is connected to a Gigaset T500 PRO or
Gigaset T300 PRO phone system and the number has been assigned to a group.
¤
Select the required connection and enter the Phone Number of the "split line" that
has been assigned to the group's phone system.
156
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Park + Orbit
This function key is used to "park" a call. The participant hears the hold music. This func-
tion key allows you to transfer calls within a group, which share acommon line. It will be
configured on all extensions for the group. The "Park + Orbit" keys on all extensions
flash if a call has been "parked" on an extension. The call can be picked up on any exten-
sion by pressing the key.
This function is only available if your telephone is connected to a Gigaset phone system
and the number has been assigned to a group. The function key can also be assigned
using the phone system.
¤
Select the required connection and enter the Phone Number of the shared line.
Speed Dial
Assigns the speed dial for a phone number to the function key.
¤
Select the required connection and enter the Phone Number that should be
selected using this function key.
BLF
A function key that is configured as BLF (Busy Lamp Field) indicates the status of a
shared line. It will be configured on all extensions for the group. The keys will flash on
all extensions if a call comes in and light up if the line on any extension is busy.
You can accept an incoming call if you have set the Directed Call Pickup Code.
This function is only available if your telephone is connected to a Gigaset phone system
and the number has been assigned to a group. The function key can also be assigned
using the phone system.
¤
Enter the Phone Number for the shared line.
¤
If you wish you accept calls with the key, enter the Directed Call Pickup Code. For a
Gigaset phone system this code is *8.
XML-Content
On a function key of this type you can store a function that has been defined in an XML
file.
¤
Enter the full path of the XML file in the text field.
All permitted functions and XML tags have been described in a specification. You can
find this at: http://wiki.gigaset.com
.
Call Divert
Assigns a call divert to the function key.
¤
Select the connection for which the call divert should apply and enter the Phone
Number to which the calls should be diverted.
The call divert set up here applies to all calls. To configure different call divert rules, use
the screen
Settings
¢
Teleph ony
¢
Call Divert (
£
page 138).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
157
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤
Click on Save to accept the key assignment.
You will now be returned to the Function Keys screen, where you can programme more keys.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
DTMF
Assigns a number to the function key that is dialled using DTMF. This is required, for
example, for querying and controlling certain network mailboxes via digit codes or for
remote operation of the local answering machine.
¤
Enter the Phone Number that should be dialled using DTMF signalling.
Menu - Next call anonymous
Opens the Select Services
¢
Next Call anonymous function in the telephone's dis-
play menu (
£
page 38) to dial a call without transmitting the number.
Menu - Call Divert
Opens the Select Services
¢
Call Divert function in the telephone's display menu
(
£
page 43) to activate/deactivate or set up a call divert.
Menu - Resource Directory
Opens the Additional Features
¢
Resource Directory menu in the telephone's dis-
play menu to select Screensavers, Caller Pictures and Sounds (
£
page 100).
Menu - Internet Radio
Opens the Additional Features
¢
Internet Radio menu in the telephone's display
menu to select an Internet radio station (
£
page 74).
None
Nothing assigned.
Note
If your telephone is connected to a Gigaset T500 PRO or Gigaset T300 PRO phone system
function keys assignments can also be downloaded to the phone's keys from the phone
system, if automatic configuration is permitted.
The following phone system function keys are transferred to the telephone:
Speed Dial, Call Divert , BLF, Park + Orbit
In this way, various functions of the keys that can be configured on the phone system can
be referred to. Further information on this can be found in the user guide for the phone
system.
158
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
System settings
You can create the following settings in the System menu:
u
Define the date and time or time server
u
Security – Change passwords for administrator and user identification (
£
page 159)
u
Display – Set the idle display, screensaver and brightness for the display (
£
page 160)
u
Load ring tones and pictures (
£
page 166)
u
Restart the device and restore factory settings (
£
page 167)
u
Save and restore telephone data (
£
page 167)
u
Perform and configure a firmware update (
£
page 168)
Date and time
On this screen you can specify a time server or enter the date and time manually.
Settings
¢
System
¢
Date and Time
Defining the time server
¤
Select Yes for Automatic adjustment of system time with time server.
¤
Enter the IP address of the required server in the Time Server field.
The most recent synchronisation carried out with the time server is shown.
Entering the date and time manually
¤
Select No for Automatic adjustment of system time with time server.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
159
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
¤
Enter the date and time:
Time format: ss:mm
Date format: dd.mm.yyyy
¤
Click on Save to save the settings.
Even if you have changed the date format in the System
¢
Display menu, enter the date
here in the format mm.dd.yyyy (
£
page 161).
Setting the time zone
¤
Select your Time Zone from the list.
¤
Activate the Automatically adjust clock to summer time changes option if necessary.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
Security
Access to the Web configurator and administration functions on the phone is password-pro-
tected for security purposes.
Settings
¢
System
¢
Security
On this screen you can change the passwords for administrator and use. For security reasons,
you should always do this after getting started with your device and then at regular intervals.
¤
Enter new passwords:
¤
For security reasons, the passwords are not displayed. Select the option Password visible,
to display the passwords in plain text.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
Default settings: User type Password
Administrator on Web configurator admin
User on Web configurator user
Administration on phone admin
Web Configurator For access to the Web configurator in user mode
Web Configurator
(Administrator)
For access to the Web configurator in administrator mode
Phone PIN For access to administrator functions on the phone
160
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Display
On this screen you can configure a range of settings for your phone display.
Settings
¢
System
¢
Display
Display screen in idle status
In idle status, the display shows either the Idle Display or a Screensaver. The difference is that
the Idle Display only covers the lower part of the display; the display icons are still visible in
the upper part. The Screensaver covers the full screen.
¤
Choose the required Idle Displayor Screensaver from the list. If No Screensaver is set, your
choice applies for Idle Display.
Possible displays:
¤
If you have selected the Pictures option, you must now choose one or more pictures. Mul-
tiple pictures are shown in sequence as a slide show.
All pictures in the phone's resource directory are available to choose from. You can down-
load your own pictures from the PC to your phone (
£
page 166).
¤
If you have selected Info Service as a Screensaver, the info service that you have defined
on the IP Info Services screen will be activated as the screensaver (
£
page 148).
Displaying a contact location in a map
If the address of a caller or contact in known in the directory, this can be shown in a map on
the display.
¤
Select On for Show map section if you want to activate the function.
¤
Select the Zoom level for the map display.
¤
Select the type of Map type. You can select from the standard display types: Roadmap,
Terrain and Hybrid.
Idle Display: Time Zones, Analog Clock, Digital Clock, Calendar, Pictures
Screensaver: No Screensaver, Analog Clock, Digital Clock, Calendar, Pictures,
Info Service
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
161
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Setting the display brightness
You can set the display brightness at seven levels and turn the display off completely at spe-
cific times, e.g., at night. These measures help to optimise the power consumption of your
device.
¤
Select the Brightness of the display from 1 to 7. 1 = dark ... 7 = very bright.
¤
Select On for Time Control if you want to deactivate the display.
¤
Enter the start and end of the period when the display should be switched off.
Defining the format for the display screen
¤
Select your required setting:
Device Language Language for the display screens
Web Interface Language Language for the Web configurator
Date Format The format that the date is shown in:
dd.mm.yyyy e.g. 03.12.2010 for 3 December 2010
mm.dd.yyyy e.g. 02.17.2010 for 17 February 2010
24-hour clock On The time is displayed in 24 hour format, e.g.
18:15
Off The time is displayed in 12 hour format, e.g.
6:15 PM
Sort Criteria Directory Select whether your local directory should be sorted by first
names or surnames.
162
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Changing the main menu
You can adjust the main menu of the phone to your requirements. To this end you should pre-
pare the desired menu in an XML file. The XML file can either be made available over the net-
work or can be downloaded in XML file format directly to the phone.
If you want to change the main menu:
¤
Select User-defined from the list Main Menu if you have an XML file with the alternative
menu.
Enter the full path of the XML file in the XML File of user-defined menu field.
¤
Select User-defined by upload file from the list Main Menu if an alternative menu is avail-
able as a file.
Click on Browse next to Upload user-defined menu. Navigate to the storage location of
the menu file in the file system on the PC and select the required file.
¤
Click on Load to download the alternative menu onto the telephone.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save the settings on this screen.
Note
All permitted XML tags have been described in a specification. You can find this at:
http://wiki.gigaset.com
.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
163
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Private contacts
On this screen you manage your local directory. All functions described here are also available
in the telephone's display menu (
£
page 50).
Settings
¢
System
¢
Local Contacts
The entries in your local directory are displayed in alphabetical order with the name of the
contact and the number set as the standard number.
Dialling a number from the directory
¤
Click the telephone symbol
next to the number. The number is dialled using the
phone's speakerphone mode.
¤
To end the call or end dialling click on .
Searching an entry
¤
Enter a name or part of a name in the search field in the upper-right corner and click on
the magnifying glass icon
å
. All entries beginning with the character string entered are
displayed,
Black BlackSusan
Brown BrownTim
Forster ForsterFred
Miller MillerPeter
White WhitePhil
164
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Creating a new entry
¤
Click on the button to create a new entry.
¤
Enter the data for the contact. The fields contain all options for the local directory on the
telephone (
£
page 51).
¤
Click on to save the entry.
Displaying an entry
¤
Click on the arrow
U
before the name to display an entry in full.
¤
Click on the arrow
V
in the upper-left to hide the entry details and return to the list.
Editing an entry
¤
Click on to edit the entry.
Deleting an entry
¤
Click on and then to delete the entry.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
165
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
All calls
On this screen you can manage your call lists. All functions described here are also available
in the telephone's display menu (
£
page 46).
Date/Time Time of the call/conference call.
Use
V
W
to sort the list in ascending/descending order according to
date.
Line VoIP account used to make the call.
Outgoing call
Accepted call
Missed call
Caller Name (if known) and number of the caller.
Call the caller.
End the call/conference call with this participant.
Duration Time spent connected to this participant.
À Delete entry.
Black Susan
Tim Brown
Forster Fred
unknown
White Phil
012222222222
166
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Loading ring tones and pictures
You can download ring tones and pictures from the PC to the device's resource directory. The
data on the PC must be in the following formats:
Settings
¢
System
¢
Upload Tones and Pictures
Loading ringtones
¤
Click on Browse next to Ringtone file. Navigate to the storage location of the sound files
in the file system on the PC and select the required file.
¤
Enter a Name for the ringtone and click on Store.
The available ringtones are listed.
Loading pictures
You can download pictures for the display and Vcard pictures from the PC to the device's
resource directory in the same way.
¤
Click on Browse next to Image File. Navigate to the storage location of the picture files in
the file system on the PC and select the required file.
¤
Enter a Name for the picture and click on Store.
The remaining free storage capacity of the resource directory in displayed under Free storage
[kB].
Type Format Size
Sounds mp3 max. 2 MB
Pictures
–Picture
–Vcard picture (CLIP)
JPG
320 x 240 pixels
64 x 78 pixels
max. 250 KB
max. 250 KB
Note
You can change the ringtone for a connection directly on the telephone (
£
page 82) or
using the Web configurator (user mode
£
page 137, administrator mode
£
page 135).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
167
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Rebooting the system and restoring factory settings
You may have to reboot your phone in certain operational situations, for instance to save
changes you have made.
Settings
¢
System
¢
Reboot and Reset
¤
Click on OK next to Reboot to reboot the system.
All phone settings can be reset to the Factory settings. This deletes all settings, lists and direc-
tory entries!
¤
Click on OK next to Start factory reset to reset the phone to factory condition.
Saving and restoring telephone data
You can save data from your phone onto your PC and, if necessary, restore it back onto the
phone.
Settings
¢
System
¢
Save and Restore
168
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Transferring data from to PC
¤
Select which data you want to save:
Directory
Vcard pictures
–Ring Tones
–Pictures
–Call Records
Phone settings (Configfile) (configuration file)
¤
Click Save to save the selected data to the PC and choose a storage location.
Transferring data from PC to phone
¤
Use the Browse button to select the file you want from your PC’s file system, or enter the
complete path name of the file in the Transfer data from PC to device field.
¤
Click on Restore.
Updating firmware
Firmware updates are available from the Gigaset website www.gigaset.com so you can
ensure your phone is always up to date. You can find the current version of your firmware on
the Device status screen (page 170). You can update your phone automatically or manually.
Your provider for Internet telephony can also deliver updates for the phone firmware and/or
for the profile of your VoIP account.
Any PC connected to the phone will not be able to access the local network and the Internet
during the firmware update.
Settings
¢
System
¢
Firmware Update
Updating firmware automatically
¤
Select Ye s for Automatic check for software updates and /or Automatic check for profile
updates.
¤
Enter the Web address for the automatic update search in the Data server field.
¤
Click on Update firmware to start the search and to load the new firmware.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
169
Configuring phone settings via the Web configurator
Updating manually
¤
Download the new firmware from the Internet onto your PC and then open the
firmware update screen.
¤
Select No for Automatic check for software updates and /or Automatic check for profile
updates.
¤
Click on Browse and select the file from the file system on your PC.
¤
Click on Load to start the update process.
When the firmware update is started, the device first checks whether the prerequisites are in
place for successfully downloading the firmware. A successful update is indicated by an advi-
sory message.
Saving settings
¤
Click on Save to save your settings on the screen.
170
Checking the status of the phone
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Checking the status of the phone
You will find information about the status of the phone and diagnostic information in the Sta-
tus menu.
Device
Status
¢
Device
This screen shows general information about your phone.
IP configuration
Software
VoIP status
List of all configured VoIP connections with the Name, Status and which connection is con-
figured as the Default Send Account.
Date and time
Current Time and Date in the device and the date of the most recent synchronisation with the
time server.
System log
Status
¢
System Log
System events e.g., system start, assigning an IP address etc., are recorded in the system log.
This screen shows the system log. The events are displayed with the Date, Time and
Message. This information may be useful in the event of problems involving Customer Care.
¤
Click on Reload to update the display.
¤
Click on Delete all entries all entries to delete the entries.
IP Address The phone's current IP address within the local network.
MAC Address LAN The phone's device address.
MAC ID The device identifier. This consists of the MAC address and a
four character provider identifier. This identifier is used for the
automatic configuration.
Firmware Version Version of the firmware currently loaded on the phone. You can
download updates of the firmware to your phone
(
£
page 168).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / web_configurator.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
171
Checking the status of the phone
SIP logging
Status
¢
SIP Protocol
SIP logging stores information about the set-up and disconnection of phone connections
and about registering your phone.
This information is useful for diagnosing errors and can be of use to Customer Care for prob-
lem solving.
¤
Click on Reload to update the display.
¤
Click on Delete all entries all entries to delete the entries.
PCAP logging
Status
¢
PCAP Logging
On this screen you can create a PCAP log file and save it for analysis at a later stage. PCAP
(Packet Capture) analyses the data traffic in the network at the phone-Ethernet interface. This
recording is carried out for diagnostic purposes and should only be made if requested by ser-
vice personnel.
¤
Click on Start. Every incoming or outgoing data packet to or from your phone is recorded.
¤
Click on Stop to stop recording.
¤
To save the PCAP file (pcapdump.pcap), click on Store and select a directory in the file sys-
tem on your PC where the file should be stored.
Checking storage allocation
Status
¢
Storage Allocation
This shows you how much storage capacity is still available on your phone.
Notes
u
The information is recorded in a ring buffer that has limited storage capacity. If the
buffer is full, the first packets will be overwritten and lost. You should therefore attempt
to record scenarios that are as short as possible.
u
This logging uses a lot of memory and CPU power and can negatively affect how the
phone behaves (e.g. slowing the display screen, distorting the ring tone etc.)
172
Service (Customer Care)
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Service (Customer Care)
You have questions? You can find help quickly in this User Manual and at
www.gigaset.com/pro
. If you have further queries regarding your Gigaset Professional phone
system please contact the dealer you bought your phone system from.
Questions and answers
If you have any queries about the use of your telephone, visit our website at
www.gigaset.com/pro
for assistance.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
173
Protecting our environment
Protecting our environment
Our environmental mission statement
We, Gigaset Communications GmbH, bear social responsibility and are actively committed to
a better world. Our ideas, technologies and actions serve people, society and the environ-
ment. The aim of our global activity is to secure sustainable life resources for humanity. We
are committed to taking responsibility for our products throughout their entire life cycle. The
environmental impact of products, including their manufacture, procurement, distribution,
use, service and disposal, is evaluated early on, during product and process design.
Further information on environmentally friendly products and processes is available on the
Internet at www.gigaset.com
.
Environmental management system
Gigaset Communications GmbH is certified according to the international
standards ISO 14001 and ISO 9001.
ISO 14001 (Environment): Certified since September 2007 by TüV SÜD Man-
agement Service GmbH.
ISO 9001 (Quality): Certified since 17/02/1994 by TüV Süd Management Ser-
vice GmbH.
Disposal
All electrical and electronic products should be disposed of separately from the municipal
waste stream via designated collection facilities appointed by the government or the local
authorities.
This crossed-out wheeled bin symbol on the product means the product is
covered by the European Directive 2002/96/EC.
The correct disposal and separate collection of your old appliance will help
prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human
health. It is a precondition for reuse and recycling of used electrical and elec-
tronic equipment.
For more detailed information about disposal of your old appliance, please contact your local
council refuse centre or the original supplier of the product.
174
Appendix
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Appendix
Caring for your telephone
Wipe the unit with a damp cloth or an antistatic cloth. Do not use solvents or microfibre
cloths. Never use a dry cloth; this can cause static.
Contact with liquid
If the device comes into contact with liquid:
§§1§§
Unplug the power supply .
§§2§§
Allow the liquid to drain from the device.
§§3§§
Pat all parts dry. Place the device (the keypad facing down) in a dry, warm place for at least
72 hours (not in a microwave, oven etc.).
§§4§§
Do not switch on the device again until it is completely dry.
When it has fully dried out, you will normally be able to use it again.
In rare cases, contact with chemical substances can cause changes to the telephone's exterior.
Due to the wide variety of chemical products available on the market, it was not possible to
test all substances.
Authorisation
Voice over IP telephony is possible via the LAN interface (IEEE 802.3). Depending on your tel-
ecommunication network interface, an additional modem could be necessary. For further
information please contact your Internet provider.
This device is intended for use worldwide. Use outside the European Economic Area (with the
exception of Switzerland) is subject to national approval.
Country-specific requirements have been taken into consideration.
We, Gigaset Communications GmbH, declare that this device meets the essential require-
ments and other relevant regulations laid down in Directive 1999/5/EC.
A copy of the 1999/5/EC Declaration of Conformity is available at this Internet address:
www.gigaset.com/docs
Using insert strips
The phone is supplied with insert strips for the function keys. If you require more blank insert
strips for the function keys, they are available as a PDF file on the product CD supplied.
!
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
175
Appendix
Using Gigaset QuickSync – additional functions for the
PC interface
You can synchronise your handset directory with Outlook. The Gigaset QuickSync program
must be installed on your computer to do so. The program is provided on the product CD.
Key combinations for phone system functions
To access the functions of Gigaset T300 PRO/Gigaset T500 PRO phone systems the following
key combinations are available:
During a call
*2
+ Phone number Marking calls as private.
*32
+ Group ID Logging the user into the group.
*33
+ Group ID Logging the user out of the group.
*L
+ Speed dial Calling a number using speed dial.
*MM
+ Login ID Logging on to the phone.
*MN
+ Login ID Logging out of the phone.
*MO
Logging all users out of the phone.
*N
+ Int. phone number Picking up a call for the user with this phone number.
*N
Randomly picking up a call.
*O
+ Voicemail box ID Checking for voicemail.
***
+ Number Establishing a call via a line with corresponding line
prefix.
**
Call2Go: Transferring a call to your other phones.
Note: Only available from Gigaset T300 PRO/Gigaset T500 PRO software ver-
sion 5 upwards.
*
Recording a call and sending as voicemail.
*2
+ Phone number Transferring a call with inquiry function.
176
Appendix
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Additional service features
Managing conference calls
*Q
+ Target phone
number
Activating the general redirect function for all calls
(Always) to one target phone number.
*QQ
Deactivating the redirect function.
*Q2
+ Target phone
number
Activating the redirect function for all calls to the target
phone number when busy.
*Q2Q
Deactivating the redirect function for all calls when
busy.
*Q3
+ Target phone
number
Activating the redirect function for all calls to the target
phone number on timeout (no response).
*Q3Q
Deactivating the redirect function for all calls on time-
out.
*QM
Activating the callback function when the line is busy.
*QMQ
Deactivating the callback function when the line is busy.
*QN
+00 to 99
(waiting ID)
Placing a held caller in a call queue or taking a caller
from the queue.
*QO
Activating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) function for all
phones.
*QOQ
Deactivating the Do-Not-Disturb (DND) function for all
phones.
*
Accessing the control options language menu.
*
Activating and deactivating mute (microphone).
*2
Requesting to speak if the moderator has activated the mute function.
*3
Moderator: Blocking and unblocking conference calls.
*4
(...
4
)
N
Gradually reducing the handset volume. N = save.
*L
(...
L
)
N
Gradually increasing the handset volume. N = save.
*M
(...
M
)
N
Gradually reducing the microphone volume. N = save.
*O
(...
O
)
N
Gradually increasing the microphone volume. N = save.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
177
Appendix
Specifications
LAN 2 port LAN switch: 10 Mbit, 100 Mbit, 1Gbit
Headset connections corded
Power supply 100–240 V, ~50/60 Hz
Power over Ethernet PoE, IEEE 802.3af, class 3
Power consumption (standby) 4.6 W
Environmental conditions in operation ±0°C to +45°C,
10% to 95% relative humidity
Language codecs G.711 μ-law/a-law, G.722, G.726, G.729AB, iLbc
Quality of Service (QoS) RSVP/DiffServ (RFC2474, RFC2475)
VoIP protocols SIP (RFC3261, RFC2543), RTP
VoIP security SRTP (RFC3711), TLS (RFC2246), SIPS
Internet protocols IPv4 (RFC0791), IPv6(RFC2460)
Further protocols STUN, ICE, TCP, DHCP
178
Open Source Software
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Open Source Software
General
Your Gigaset device includes Open Source software that is subject to various license condi-
tions. With regard to Open Source software, the granting of usage rights that go beyond the
operation of the device in the form manufactured by Gigaset Communications GmbH is gov-
erned by the relevant license conditions of the Open Source software.
Information on license rights and copyright
Your Gigaset device includes Open Source software that is subject to the GNU General Public
License (GPL) / the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The corresponding license con-
ditions are shown at the end of this section, in their original version. The appropriate source
code can be downloaded from the internet at http://www.gigaset.com/opensource/
The
appropriate source code can also be requested from Gigaset Communications GmbH within
three years of purchasing the product. Please use the contact details provided at
www.gigaset.com/service
.
License texts
GNU General Public Licence (GPL)
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this licence document, but
changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licences for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licence is intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software – to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General
Public Licence applies to most of the Free Software Foundation's software and to any other
program where the authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation soft-
ware is covered by the GNU Lesser General Public Licence instead.) You can apply it to your
programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public
Licences are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free
software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if
you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs, and
that you know you can do these things.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
179
Open Source Software
To protect your rights, we need to impose restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these
rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate into certain responsi-
bilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or
can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this licence
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author's protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone under-
stands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone
else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so
that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors' reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the
danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licences, in effect
making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must
be licensed for everyone's free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for
copying, distribution and modification follow.
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENCE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This Licence applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public Licence.
The "Program", below, refers to any such program or work, and a "work based on the Program"
means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work
containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or trans-
lated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term "modification".) Each licensee is addressed as "you".
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this Licence;
they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output
from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program
(independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends
on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you receive
it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy
an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty, keep intact all the notices that
refer to this Licence and to the absence of any warranty, and give any other recipients of the
Program a copy of this Licence along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may, at your discre-
tion, offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
180
Open Source Software
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a
work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed
the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains
or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge
to all third parties under the terms of this Licence.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must
cause it, when running is commenced for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to
print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice
that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may
redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy
of this Licence. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an
announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that
work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and
separate works in themselves, then this Licence, and its terms, do not apply to those sections
when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as
part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be
on the terms of this Licence, in which the permissions for other licensees extend to the entire
whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of
this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the
intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based
on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program
(or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this Licence.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above, provided that you also
do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which
must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily
used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party,
for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a com-
plete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under
the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software inter-
change; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute correspond-
ing source code. (This alternative is allowed only for non-commercial distribution and only
if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in
accordance with sub-section b above.)
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
181
Open Source Software
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to
it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it
contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compi-
lation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code dis-
tributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel and so on) of the operating system on
which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a desig-
nated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to
copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sub-license or distribute the Program except as expressly pro-
vided under this Licence. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sub-license or distribute the
Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this Licence. However,
parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this Licence will not have their
licences terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this Licence, since you have not signed it. However, nothing
else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These
actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this Licence. Therefore, by modifying or dis-
tributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of
this Licence to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying
the Program or works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient
automatically receives a licence from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the
Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions
on the recipients' exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing
compliance by third parties to this Licence.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any
other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court
order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this Licence, they do not
excuse you from the conditions of this Licence. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simul-
taneously your obligations under this Licence and any other pertinent obligations, then as a
consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent licence would
not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this Licence would
be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circum-
stance, the remainder of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is
intended to apply in other circumstances.
182
Open Source Software
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property
right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of pro-
tecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public
licence practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of soft-
ware distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it
is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the
rest of this Licence.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program are restricted in certain countries either by
patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program
under this Licence may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those
countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In
such a case, this Licence incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this Licence.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General
Public Licence from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present ver-
sion, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version num-
ber of this Licence which applies to it and "any later version", you have the option of following
the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free
Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this Licence, you
may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs for which the dis-
tribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software
which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Founda-
tion; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of
preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing
and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE
PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE
STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PRO-
GRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUD-
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF
THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
183
Open Source Software
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL
ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE
THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE
OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH
HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to apply these terms to your new programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public,
the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and
change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should
have at least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public Licence along with this program;
if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA
02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an inter-
active mode:
The hypothetical commands 'show w' and 'show c' should show the appropriate parts of the
General Public Licence. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other
than 'show w' and 'show c'; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items – whatever suits
your program.
<one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Gen-
eral Public Licence as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the Licence, or (at
your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without
even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
GNU General Public Licence for more details.
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type 'show w'. This is free software,
and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type 'show c' for details.
184
Open Source Software
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign
a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
This General Public Licence does not permit you to incorporate your program into proprietary
programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit
linking of proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU
Lesser General Public Licence instead of this Licence.
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program 'Gnomovision' (which makes
passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989, Ty Coon, President of Vice
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / appendix.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
185
Accessories
Accessories
Extension module each with 14 additional programmable keys
For Gigaset DE900 IP PRO: ZY900 PRO Product number: S30852-S2210-R701
For Gigaset DE700 IP PRO: ZY700 PRO Product number: S30852-S2211-R701
186
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Glossary
A
ADSL
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line
Special form of DSL.
ALG
Application Layer Gateway
NAT control mechanism of a router.
Many routers with integrated NAT use ALG. ALG lets the data packets in a VoIP connection
pass and adds the public IP address of the secure private network.
The router's ALG should be deactivated if the VoIP provider offers a STUN server or an out-
bound proxy.
See also: Firewall, NAT, Outbound proxy, STUN.
Authentication
Restriction of access to a network/service by using an ID and password to log in.
Automatic redial
Several attempts to call are made automatically when the line is busy. The number is
adjustable.
B
Block dialling
Enter the complete phone number, and correct it if necessary. Then pick up the receiver or
press the speaker key to dial the phone number.
Broadband Internet access
See DSL.
Buddy
Subscriber with whom you exchange brief messages on the Internet in real time (chat-
ting).
See also: Instant messaging.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
187
Glossary
C
Call divert
CD
Automatic diversion (CD) of a call to a different telephone number. There are three kinds
of call divert:
CDU, Call Divert Unconditional
CDB, Call Divert Busy
CDNR, Call Divert No Reply
Call swap
Call swap allows you to switch between two callers or between a conference and an indi-
vidual caller without allowing the waiting caller to listen to the call.
Call waiting
= CW. VoIP provider feature. A beep during a call indicates that another caller is waiting.
You can accept or reject the second call. You can activate/deactivate the feature.
CD
Call divert
See Call divert.
Chatting
Form of communication on the Internet. During a chat, brief messages are exchanged
between the communicating parties in real time. Chatting in this sense is understood to
be a written form of communication.
Client
Application that requests a service from a server.
CLIP
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Telephony feature. The number of the caller is transferred to the called party's phone dis-
play (if the caller activates this feature). The called party's phone must be compatible with
CLIP and the feature must be enabled on the phone port.
Codec
Coder/decoder
Codec is a procedure that digitalises and compresses analogue voice before it is sent via
the Internet, and decodes – i.e., translates into analogue voice – digital data when voice
packets are received. There are different codecs, with differing degrees of compression, for
instance.
Both parties involved in the telephone connection (caller/sender and recipient) must use
the same codec. This is negotiated between the sender and the recipient when establish-
ing a connection.
188
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
The choice of codec is a compromise between voice quality, transmission speed and the
necessary bandwidth. A high level of compression, for example, means that the band-
width required for each voice connection is low. However, it also means that the time
needed to compress/decompress the data is greater, which increases execution time for
data in the network and thus impairs voice quality. The time required increases the delay
between the sender speaking and the recipient hearing what has been said.
COLP/COLR
Connected Line Identification Presentation/Restriction
Feature provided by a VoIP connection for outgoing calls.
COLP displays the phone number accepting the call on the calling party's display unit.
The number of the party accepting the call is different to the dialled number, e.g., if the call
is diverted or transferred.
The called party can use COLR (Connected Line Identification Restriction) to prevent the
number from appearing on the calling party's display.
Consultation call
You are on a call. With a consultation call, you interrupt the conversation briefly to estab-
lish a second connection to another participant. If you end the connection to this partici-
pant immediately, then this was a consultation call. If you switch to and fro between the
first and second participants, it is called call swapping.
CW
Call waiting
See Call waiting.
D
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Internet protocol that regulates the automatic assignment of IP addresses to network
subscribers. The protocol is made available in the network by a server. A DHCP server can,
for example, be a router.
The phone contains a DHCP client. A router that contains a DHCP server can assign the IP
addresses for the phone automatically from a defined address block. This dynamic assign-
ment means that several network subscribers can share one IP address, although they use
it alternately and not simultaneously.
With some routers you can specify that the IP address for the phone is never changed.
Displayed name
VoIP provider feature. You can specify any name that is to be shown to the other party dur-
ing a call instead of your phone number.
DMZ (Demilitarised Zone)
DMZ describes a part of a network that is outside the firewall.
A DMZ is set up, as it were, between a network you want to protect (e.g., a LAN) and a non-
secure network (e.g., the Internet). A DMZ permits unrestricted access from the Internet to
only one or a few network components, while the other network components remain
secure behind the firewall.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
189
Glossary
DNS
Domain Name System
Hierarchical system that permits the assignment of IP addresses to domain names that
are easier to remember. This assignment has to be managed by a local DNS server in each
(W)LAN. The local DNS server determines the IP address, if necessary by enquiring about
superordinate DNS servers and other local DNS servers on the Internet.
You can specify the IP address of the primary/secondary DNS server.
See also: DynDNS.
Domain name
Name of one (several) Web server(s) on the Internet (e.g., www.gigaset.com). The domain
name is assigned to the relevant IP address by DNS.
DSCP
Differentiated Service Code Point
See Quality of Service (QoS).
DSL
Digital Subscriber Line
Data transfer technology which allows Internet access over conventional phone lines. Pre-
requisites: DSL modem and the appropriate service offered by the Internet provider.
DSLAM
Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
The DSLAM is a switch cabinet in an exchange at which all subscriber connectors con-
verge.
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency
Another description for dual tone multi-frequency dialling (DTMF).
Dynamic IP Address
A dynamic IP address is assigned to a network component automatically via DHCP. The
dynamic IP address for a network component can change every time it registers or at cer-
tain time intervals.
See also: Fixed IP address.
DynDNS
Dynamic DNS
DNS is used to assign domain names and IP addresses. For dynamic IP addresses this ser-
vice is now enhanced with Dynamic DNS. This permits the use of a network component
with a dynamic IP address as a server on the Internet. DynDNS ensures that a service can
always be addressed on the Internet under the same domain name regardless of the cur-
rent IP address.
190
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
E
ECT
Explicit Call Transfer
Participant A calls participant B. The participant puts the connection on hold and calls par-
ticipant C. Rather than connect everyone in a three-party conference, A now transfers par-
ticipant B to C and hangs up.
EEPROM
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
Memory building block in your phone with fixed data (e.g., default and customised set-
tings) and data saved automatically (e.g., call list entries).
Ethernet network
Wired LAN.
Ethernet uses a base band cable for data transmission with a transmission rate of 10 or 100
Mbps or 1 Gbps.
F
Firewall
You can use a firewall to protect your network against unauthorised external access. This
involves combining various measures and technologies (hardware and/or software) to
control the flow of data between a private network you wish to protect and an unpro-
tected network (e.g., the Internet).
See also: NAT.
Firmware
Device software in which basic information is saved for the functioning of a device. To cor-
rect errors or update the device software, a new version of the firmware can be loaded into
the device's memory (firmware update).
Fixed IP address
A fixed IP address is assigned to a network component manually during network configu-
ration. Unlike a dynamic IP address, a fixed IP address never changes.
Flat rate
System of billing for an Internet connection. The Internet service provider charges a set
monthly fee. There are no additional charges for the duration of the connection or number
of connections.
Fragmentation
Data packets that are too big are split into smaller packets (fragments) before they are
transferred. They are put together again when they reach the recipient (defragmented).
Full duplex
Data transmission is a mode in which data can be sent and received at the same time.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
191
Glossary
G
G.711 a law, G.711 μ law
Standard for a codec.
G.711 delivers a very good voice quality that corresponds to that in the ISDN fixed line. As
there is little compression, the necessary bandwidth is around 64 kbit/s per voice connec-
tion, but the delay caused by coding/decoding is only approx. 0.125 ms.
"a law" describes the European standard and "μ law" describes the North American/Japa-
nese equivalent.
G.722
Standard for a codec.
G.722 is a broadband language codec with a bandwidth of 50 Hz to 7 kHz, a net transmis-
sion rate of 64 kbit/s per language connection and integrated speech pause recognition
and comfort noise generation (silence suppression).
G.722 delivers very good voice quality. A higher sampling rate provides clearer and better
voice quality than other codecs and enables a speech tone in High Definition Sound Per-
formance (HDSP).
G.726
Standard for a codec.
G.726 delivers a good voice quality. It is inferior to the quality with codec G.711 but better
than with G.729.
G.729A/B
Standard for a codec.
The voice quality is more likely to be lower with G.729A/B. As a result of the high level of
compression, the necessary bandwidth is only around 8 kbit/s per voice connection, but
the delay is around 15 ms.
Gateway
Connects two different networks, e.g., a router as an Internet gateway.
For phone calls from VoIP to the telephone network, a gateway has to be connected to the
IP network and the telephone network (gateway/VoIP provider). It forwards calls from VoIP
to the telephone network as required.
Gateway provider
See SIP provider.
Global IP address
See IP address.
GSM
Global System for Mobile Communication
Originally, a European standard for mobile networks. GSM can now be described as a
worldwide standard. However, in the USA and Japan, national standards were previously
more frequently supported.
192
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
H
Headset
Combination of microphone and headphone. A headset makes using speaker mode more
convenient. Headsets that can be connected to the telephone via a cable are available.
HTTP proxy
Server via which network subscribers can process their Internet traffic.
Hub
Connects several network subscribers in one infrastructure network. All data sent to the
hub by one network subscriber is forwarded to all network subscribers.
See also: Gateway, Router.
I
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
International body that defines standards in electronics and electrical engineering, con-
cerned in particular with the standardisation of LAN technology, transmission protocols,
data transfer rate and wiring.
Infrastructure network
Network with central structure: All network subscribers communicate via a central router.
Instant messaging
Service that uses a client program to allow chatting in real time, i.e., to send brief messages
to other subscribers on the Internet.
Internet
Global WAN. A series of protocols known as TCP/IP have been defined for exchanging
data.
All network subscribers are identifiable by an IP address. DNS assigns a domain name to
the IP address.
Important services on the Internet include the World Wide Web (WWW), e-mail, file trans-
fer and discussion forums.
Internet service provider
Enables access to the Internet for a fee.
Internet telephony
Voice over IP.
IP (Internet Protocol)
TCP/IP protocol on the Internet. IP is responsible for the addressing of subscribers in a net-
work using IP addresses, and routes data from a sender to the recipient. IP determines the
paths (routing) along which the data packets travel.
There are standard IPv4 and IPv6 protocols; the essential difference is the structure of the
IP addresses.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
193
Glossary
IP address
A unique address for a network component within a network based on the TCP/IP proto-
cols (e.g., LAN, Internet). On the Internet, domain names are usually assigned instead of IP
addresses. DNS assigns the corresponding IP address to the domain name.
The IPv4 IP address has four parts (decimal numbers between 0 and 255) separated by full
stops (e.g., 230.94.233.2).
The IP address is made up of the network number and the number of the network sub-
scriber (e.g., phone). Depending on the subnet mask, the first, second or third part makes
up the network number and the rest of the IP address addresses the network component.
The network number of all the components in any one network must be identical.
IP addresses can be assigned automatically with DHCP (dynamic IP addresses) or manually
(static IP addresses).
See also: DHCP.
IP pool range
Range of IP addresses that the DHCP server can use to assign dynamic IP addresses.
L
LAN
Local Area Network
Network with a restricted physical range. A LAN can be wireless (WLAN) and/or wired
(Ethernet).
LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
Service for managing directories across a network.
LDAP is used to store and access information about individuals who are part of an organi-
sation (e.g., employees).
Local IP address
The local or private IP address is the address for a network component in the local network
(LAN). The network operator can assign any address he or she wants. Devices that act as a
link from a local network to the Internet (gateway or router) have a public and a private IP
address.
See also IP address.
Local SIP port
See SIP port/Local SIP port.
194
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
M
MAC address
Media Access Control address
Hardware address by means of which each network device (e.g., network card, switch,
phone) can be uniquely identified worldwide. It consists of six parts (hexadecimal num-
bers) separated by a "-" (e.g., 00-90-65-44-00-3A).
The MAC address is assigned by the manufacturer and cannot be changed.
Mbps
Million bits per second
Unit of the transmission speed in a network.
MRU
Maximum Receive Unit
Defines the maximum user data volume within a data packet.
MTU
Maximum Transmission Unit
Defines the maximum length of a data packet that can be carried over the network at a
time.
Music on hold
Music is played while you are making a consultation call or call swapping. The waiting
participant hears music while on hold.
N
NAT
Network Address Translation
Method for converting (private) IP addresses to one or more (public) IP addresses. With
NAT, the IP addresses of network subscribers (e.g., VoIP phones) in a LAN can be hidden
behind a joint IP address for the router in the Internet.
VoIP telephones behind a NAT router cannot be reached by VoIP servers (on account of the
private IP address). To "bypass" NAT it is possible to either use ALG in the router, STUN in
the VoIP telephone or an outbound proxy for the VoIP provider.
If an outbound proxy is made available you must allow for this in the VoIP settings for your
phone.
Network
Group of devices. Devices can be connected in either wired or wireless mode.
Networks can also differ in range and structure:
Range: Local networks (LAN) or wide-area networks (WAN)
Structure: Infrastructure network or ad hoc network
Network subscriber
Devices and PCs that are connected to each other in a network, e.g., servers, PCs and
phones.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
195
Glossary
O
Outbound proxy
Alternative NAT control mechanism to STUN and ALG.
Outbound proxies are implemented by the VoIP provider in firewall/NAT environments as
an alternative to a SIP proxy server. They control data traffic through the firewall.
Outbound proxy and STUN servers should not be used simultaneously.
See also: STUN and NAT.
P
PIN
Personal Identification Number
Protects against unauthorised use. When the PIN is activated, a number combination has
to be entered to access a protected area.
Port
Data is exchanged between two applications in a network across a port.
Port forwarding
The Internet gateway (e.g., your router) forwards data packets from the Internet to the
port that the data is intended for. This allows servers in the LAN to offer services on the
Internet without you needing a public IP address.
Port number
Indicates a specific application of a network subscriber. Depending on the setting in the
LAN, the port number is permanently assigned or else it is newly assigned with each
access.
The combination of IP address/port number identifies the recipient or sender of a data
packet within a network.
Prepare dialling
See Block dialling.
Private IP address
See Public IP address.
Protocol
Describes the agreements for communicating within a network. It contains rules for open-
ing, administering and closing a connection, about data formats, time frames and possible
error handling.
Proxy/Proxy server
Computer program that controls the exchange of data between client and server in com-
puter networks. If the phone sends a query to the VoIP server, the proxy acts as a server
towards the phone and as a client towards the server. A proxy is addressed via the IP
address/domain name and port.
Public IP address
The public IP address is the address for a network component on the Internet. It is assigned
by the Internet service provider. Devices that act as a link from a local network to the Inter-
net (gateway, router) have a public and a local IP address.
See also: IP address, NAT.
196
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Q
Quality of Service (QoS)
Describes the Quality of Service in communication networks. Differentiations are made
between various Quality of Service classes.
QoS influences the flow of data packets on the Internet, e.g., by prioritising data packets,
reserving bandwidth and optimising data packets.
In VoIP networks, QoS influences the voice quality. If the whole infrastructure (router, net-
work server etc.) has QoS, the voice quality is better, i.e., fewer delays, less echoing, less
crackling.
R
RAM
Random Access Memory
Memory in which you have reading and storage rights. Items such as melodies and screen
pictures are saved in the RAM after you have loaded them onto the phone via the Web
configurator.
Registrar
The registrar manages the network subscribers' current IP addresses. When you register
with your VoIP provider, your current IP address is saved on the registrar. This means you
can also be reached when on the move.
ROM
Read Only Memory
A type of memory that can only be read.
Router
Routes data packets within a network and between different networks via the quickest
route. Can connect Ethernet networks and WLAN. Can be the gateway to the Internet.
Routing
Routing is the transfer of data packets to another subscriber in your network. On their way
to the recipient, the data packets are sent from one router to the next until they reach their
destination.
If data packets were not forwarded in this way, a network like the Internet would not be
possible. Routing connects the individual networks to this global system.
A router is a part of this system; it transfers data packets both within a local network and
from one network to the next. Transfer of data from one network to another is performed
on the basis of a common protocol.
RSS feed
Really Simple Syndication (also Rich Site Summary)
Provision of data in RSS format. RSS is an Internet service that summarises an Internet page
in a short paragraph and includes a link to the original page. Users can subscribe to an RSS
feed and receive automatically updated information.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
197
Glossary
RTCP
Real-Time Control Protocol
Is used to control the RTP protocol. The RTCP protocol is a control protocol and therefore
knows which of the transferred RTP sessions belong together.
RTCP port
(Local) port by means of which voice data packets are sent and received for VoIP.
RTP
Real-Time Transport Protocol
Global standard for transferring audio and video data. Often used in conjunction with UDP.
In this case, RTP packets are embedded in UDP packets.
S
Server
Makes a service available to other network subscribers (clients). The term can indicate a
computer/PC or an application. A server is addressed via the IP address/domain name
and port.
SIP (Session Initiation Protocol)
Signalling protocol independent of voice communication. Used for establishing and end-
ing a call. It is also possible to define parameters for voice transmission.
SIP address
See URI.
SIP port/Local SIP port
(Local) port by means of which SIP signalling data is sent and received for VoIP.
SIP provider
See VoIP provider.
SIP proxy server
IP address of your VoIP provider's gateway server.
Static IP address
See Fixed IP address.
STUN
Simple Transversal of UDP over NAT
NAT control mechanism.
STUN is a data protocol for VoIP telephones. STUN replaces the private IP address in the
VoIP telephone data packets with the public address of the secure private network. To con-
trol data transfer, a STUN server is also required on the Internet. STUN cannot be imple-
mented with symmetric NATs.
See also: ALG, Firewall, NAT, Outbound proxy.
Subnet
Segment of a network.
198
Glossary
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
Subnet mask
IP addresses consist of a fixed line network number and a variable subscriber number. The
network number is identical for all network subscribers. The size of the network number
part is determined in the subnet mask. In the subnet mask 255.255.255.0, for example, the
first three parts of the IP address are the network number and the last part is the subscriber
number.
Symmetric NAT
A symmetric NAT assigns different external IP addresses and port numbers to the same
internal IP addresses and port numbers – depending on the external target address.
T
TCP
Transmission Control Protocol
Transport protocol. Session-based transmission protocol: it sets up, monitors and termi-
nates a connection between sender and recipient for transporting data.
TLS
Transport Layer Security
Protocol for encrypting data transmissions on the Internet. TLS is a superordinate trans-
port protocol.
Transmission rate
Speed at which data is transmitted in the WAN or LAN. The transmission rate is measured
in data units per unit of time (Mbit/s).
Transport protocol
Controls data transport between two communication partners (applications).
See also: UDP, TCP, TLS.
U
UDP
User Datagram Protocol
Transport protocol. Unlike TCP, UDP is a non session-based protocol. UDP does not estab-
lish a fixed connection. The recipient is solely responsible for making sure the data is
received. The sender is not notified about whether it is received or not.
URI
Uniform Resource Identifier
Character sequence for identifying resources (e.g., e-mail recipient, www.gigaset.com,
files).
On the Internet, URIs are used as a unique identification for resources. URIs are also
described as SIP addresses.
URIs can be entered in the phone as a number. By dialling a URI, you can call an Internet
subscriber with VoIP equipment.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / glossary.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
199
Glossary
URL
Universal Resource Locator
Globally unique address of a domain on the Internet.
A URL is a subtype of the URI. URLs identify a resource by its location on the Internet. For
historical reasons the term is often used as a synonym for URI.
User ID
See User identification.
User identification
Name/number combination for access, e.g., to your VoIP account.
V
Voice codec
See Codec.
VoIP
Voice over Internet Protocol
Calls are no longer established and transmitted via the telephone network, but via the
Internet (or other IP networks).
VoIP provider
A VoIP, SIP or gateway provider is an Internet service provider that provides a gateway for
Internet telephony. As the phone works with the SIP standard, your provider must support
the SIP standard.
The provider routes calls from VoIP to the telephone network (analogue, ISDN and mobile)
and vice versa.
W
WAN
Wide Area Network
Wide-area network that is unrestricted in terms of area (e.g., Internet).
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
200
Index
Index
A
Acknowledge tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Activating DTMF using a function key
.
157
Adjusting the volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Advisory tone
confirmation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
key press
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Advisory tones
activating/deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Alarm clock function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
activating/deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
Anonymous calling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Appointment
deleting from calendar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
displaying in calendar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
Attributes
LDAP database
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
Audio quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
Authentication
OpenVPN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Authorisation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Automatic configuration
of VoIP accounts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
B
Backlight
brightness
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
Birthday
displaying in calendar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
showing on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
BLF
assigning a function key
. . . . . . . . . . .
156
BLF (Busy Lamp Field)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
C
CA certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
OpenVPN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Calendar
deleting appointments
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
icons
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
Calendar
showing on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Call
accepting via receiver
. . . . . . . . . . .
35
,
77
anonymous
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
in call list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
incoming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
missed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
outgoing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
rejecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
,
77
transferring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
two-way recording
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Call divert
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
,
138
,
156
no answer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
,
44
when busy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43
,
44
Call duration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Call list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
all calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
deleting an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
dialling a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
,
48
in Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
165
missed calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
,
46
outgoing calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
redial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
saved information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
transferring entry to directory
. . . . . . . .
49
Call manager
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
124
Call records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
duration
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
playing back via the display menu
. . . .
63
Call records key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
38
Call swap
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
Call transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
blind
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
secure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
42
Call Waiting
blocking
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Call waiting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
accepting call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
activating/deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
40
rejecting call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
201
Index
Caller
name on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
picture on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Caller picture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
in directory entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
in resource directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
Calling Line Identification
. . . . . . . . . .
38
,
47
withholding for all calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
withholding once
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Caring for your telephone
. . . . . . . .
172
,
174
Certificate
importing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
,
130
invalid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
OpenVPN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Characters
correcting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
upper, lower case
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Checking the capacity of the
resource directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
Client certificate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Client key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
CLIP (Calling Line Identification
Presentation)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47
CLIR (Calling Line Identification
Restriction)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38
Codec
G.711 a law
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
G.711 μ law
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
G.722
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
G.726
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
G.729
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
Codec preference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
136
Conference call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
adding callers on hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
adding new participants
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
41
Conference key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
,
41
Configuring an e-mail account
. . . . . . .
114
Confirmation tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Connecting
extension module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
network cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
PC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
power adapter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
receiver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Connecting a PC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Connecting the network cable
. . . . . . . . .
14
Connection frame for extension module 17
Consultation call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Consultation key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
39
Contact with liquid
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Contents
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
Correcting
incorrectly entered characters
. . . . . . . .
23
incorrectly entered digit
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
Counting accepted calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Counting missed calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Country
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
Counts for missed and accepted calls
.
135
D
Data
memory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
Date
setting via display menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
Deactivating the microphone
. . . . . . . . . .
37
Default number in directory entry
. . . . . .
54
Deleting a digit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
Determining prefix length
. . . . . . . . . . .
120
DHCP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
DHCP relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
Diagnostic information
PCAP logging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
SIP logging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
system log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Dialling a number
cancelling
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
from call list (display)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
from directory (display)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32
from the call list (Web configurator)
165
via function key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Dialling code
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
Dialling plans
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
140
Dialling see Dialling a number
DiffServ (Differentiated Services)
. . . . .
125
Directories
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
Directory
accessing via key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
map
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
transferring from PC to phone
. . . . . .
168
transferring to PC
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
Directory entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
caller picture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
changing default number
. . . . . . . . . . . .
54
creating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
202
Index
Directory entry
deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
,
52
,
78
editing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
54
entering numbers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Directory key
programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
Directory, LDAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
,
151
dialling a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
searching for an entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
Directory, local
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
55
entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
Directory, net
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
displaying entry details
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
personal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
public
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
57
refining search
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
60
search results
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
searching for a name
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59
searching for a number
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
58
transferring entry to directory
. . . . . . . .
60
Directory, online
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
selecting a provider
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
150
Display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
,
160
backlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
brightness
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
Calling Line Identification
. . . . . . . . . . . .
35
display formats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
during call
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
in idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
,
84
menu tree
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
returning to idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
setting the language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
time-controlled deactivation
. . . . . . .
161
Display format, LDAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
Display functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
,
160
Display icons
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Display in idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
displaying calendar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
displaying picture
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
displaying time zones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
returning
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
Display keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
22
Display menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
illustration in the user guide
. . . . . . . . .
27
Disposal
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
DND (Do Not Disturb) see
Do Not Disturb
DNS server
alternate
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
,
97
,
119
,
120
preferred
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
,
97
,
119
,
120
Do Not Disturb
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Do Not Disturb (DND)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
141
Do Not Disturb key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
37
Door interphone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
video cameras
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
Door interphone video camera
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
149
displaying pictures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
Door opener
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
77
DSL router
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
E
E-mail
deleting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
displaying messages
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
displaying new messages
. . . . . .
114
,
143
in Message Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
messages whilst making a connection66
notification
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
opening incoming e-mail list
. . . . . . . . .
65
reading
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
spam protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
via secure connection (SSL)
. . . .
114
,
143
E-mail account
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
114
E-mail icon
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
new message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
read message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
E-mail server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Encryption
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
End key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
32
Ending call
by hanging up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
with end call key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
Entering special characters
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
24
Entering standard gateway
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
Entering text
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
203
Index
Entry mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Environment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
173
Error tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
Ethernet
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
,
93
Ethernet cable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
Extension module
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
connection frame
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
F
Factory settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
,
167
restoring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
File server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Filter, LDAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
Firmware update
automatic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
manual
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
169
Firmware updates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
168
Firmware version
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Function key
accessing menu function
. . . . . . . . . .
157
BLF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
call divert
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
connection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
DTMF
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
157
Park + Orbit
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
speed dial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
split line
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
XML data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
Function keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
additional
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
programming
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
,
155
G
G.722
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2
Getting started
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
Gigabit switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
Gigaset QuickSync
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
Gigaset T500
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
GNU General Public Licence (GPL)
. . . .
178
GNU General Public License (GPL)
English
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
GNU Lesser General Public License_ (LGPL),
English
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
GPL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
H
Headset
adjusting the volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
calling via
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Headset key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
HTTP server
operating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
I
ICE (Interactive Connectivity
Establishment)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
126
Idle display
showing slide show
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
Idle status (display)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
Incoming e-mail list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Incoming e-mail server
. . . . . . .
64
,
114
,
142
Info service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
for screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
XML site
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Info services
activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
door interphone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
76
Internet radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
News
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
selecting for screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . .
145
weather report
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
,
147
webcam
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Information Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
72
Information Centre key
. . . . . . . . . .
3
,
72
,
79
Insert strips
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
174
Installation wizard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
Internet radio
activating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
selecting stations
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
,
148
Internet service
as screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Internet telephony
configuring
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
,
108
IP address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
auto-configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
96
,
119
dynamic
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
,
118
finding
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
IPv4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
,
118
IPv6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
,
120
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
204
Index
IP address
prefix
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
,
120
static
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
,
94
,
96
,
118
,
119
IP protocol
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
,
94
,
117
IPv4
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
IPv6
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
K
Kensington lock
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
Key
call records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
38
conference
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
,
41
consultation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
39
display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Do Not Disturb
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
37
end
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
headset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
Information Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
72
,
79
Message Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
33
,
67
mute
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
37
navigation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
24
programmable
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
speaker
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
37
transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
,
42
volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
36
Key shortcuts for phone
system functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
175
L
LAN port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15
LAN settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
,
117
Language
for the display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
161
for the Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . .
161
LDAP
display format
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
display name
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
name attributes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
number attributes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
number filter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
search area
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
server address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
server port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
154
LDAP (Lightweight Directory
Access Protocol)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access
Protocol)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
LDAP attributes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
LDAP contacts
in display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
56
,
151
LDAP filter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
152
LDAP server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
151
LEDs see Light Emitting Diodes
Licence, GPL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
License
GPL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
LGPL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
178
Light Emitting Diodes
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
List
accepted calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
all calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
missed calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
redial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
scrolling through
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
26
Local contacts
in display menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
Local directory
creating entry in Web configurator
.
164
in Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
LZO compression
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
M
Main menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
customising individually
. . . . . . . . . . .
162
Making calls
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Managing the calendar
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
68
Map
activating display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
160
displaying
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
for directory entry
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
78
Medical equipment
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Memory keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
Menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
navigation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
start tone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
25
Menu tree
display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
29
Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
Message Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
,
67
icons
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
opening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
opening message list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
205
Index
Message Centre key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
67
Messages
call records
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
e-mails
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
voice
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
Messaging
voice
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
Missed alarm
deleting from list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
69
in Message Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Missed call
in call list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
46
in Message Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
Move cursor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Mute key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
37
Mute see Muting
Muting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
MWI (Message Waiting Indication)
.
61
,
144
N
NAS system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
NAT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Navigation key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
24
Network
setting up for the first time
. . . . . . . . . . .
19
setting up via display menu
. . . . . . . . . .
93
setting up via Web configurator
. . . .
117
wired
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
93
Network configuration
default setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
Network mailbox
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
,
142
new message
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
Network provider data
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Network type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
94
News
display as screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Notification of incoming e-mail
. . . . . . . . .
64
Number
dialling from call list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48
dialling from LDAP directory
. . . . . . . . .
56
dialling from the directory
. . . . . . . . .
163
entering via keypad
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
searching in directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
selecting from the directory
. . . . . . . . . .
55
showing on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
transferring to local directory
. . . . . . . .
32
Number filter, LDAP
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
153
O
On hold
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Online directory see
Directory, online
Open listening
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
OpenSSL
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
OpenVPN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
authentication
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
DHCP relay
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
130
hardened security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
static key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
OpenVPN client
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
Operating the telephone
via display menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
Outbound proxy
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Outbound server
address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
P
Park + Orbit
assigning a function key
. . . . . . . . . . .
156
Password
displaying in readable form
. . . . . . . .
159
Password for Web configurator
. . . . . . .
159
PCAP log file
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
Phone
factory settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
rebooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
Phone system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
type
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
123
Pictures
for callers in directory entry
(display menu)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52
for display in idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
88
for slide show
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
in resource directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
PoE (Power over Ethernet)
. . . . . . . . . .
9
,
15
Power adapter
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
connecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
Prefix of the IP address
. . . . . . . . . . . .
97
,
120
Priority of voice data
. . . . . . . . . .
98
,
122
,
125
Private contacts
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
163
Programmable keys
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
Protection against theft
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
16
Provider profile
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
109
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
206
Index
Provisioning file
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Q
QoS (Quality of Service)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
Questions and answers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
R
Reboot
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
Rebooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
167
Receiver
adjusting the volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
connecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
Redial list
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
,
46
Registration server
port
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
Reset
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
Resource directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
caller pictures
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
102
checking capacity
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
104
file formats
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100
pictures for screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . .
101
sounds for ringers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
103
Restoring the default settings
. . . . . . . . . .
92
Ringback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34
activating/deactivating function
. . . . .
34
Ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
adjusting the volume while phone
is ringing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
alternative volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
for alarm clock function
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
71
setting melody
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
silencing for anonymous calls
. . . . . . . .
83
sound in resource directory
. . . . . . . .
103
volume for appointments
. . . . . . . . . . . .
81
volume for incoming calls
. . . . . . . . . . . .
81
RSS feed
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
RSS feeds
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
73
RTP (Realtime Transport Protocol)
. . . .
125
S
Safety precautions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
Screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Internet service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
pictures in resource directory
. . . . . .
101
selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
selecting an info service
. . . . . . . . . . .
145
Screensaver see Screensaver
Security settings
server certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
,
130
Server certificates
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
127
,
130
Setting a ring tone
in user mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
Setting language
for Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
Setting the language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
setting up for the first time
. . . . . . . . . . .
18
Setting the ring tone
administrator mode
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
135
Setting up the device via the display
. . . .
18
Settings
configuring via Web configurator
. . .
116
information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
Settings via display menu
advisory tones
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
date and time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
display backlight
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
91
display in idle status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
84
display language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
92
ringers
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
89
Setup assistant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
closing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
115
Silence suppression
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
137
SIP address
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
SIP logging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
SIP provider
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
Slide show
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
87
Sound
in resource directory
. . . . . . . . . .
100
,
103
Spam protection
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
Speaker
activating/deactivating
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
37
Speaker key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
31
,
37
Speaker mode
adjusting the volume
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
Specifications
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36
,
177
Speed dial
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
Split line
assigning function key
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
155
defining for function key
. . . . . . . . . . .
155
using
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33
SRTP (Secure Real-Time Protocol)
. . . . .
128
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
207
Index
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)
. . . . . . . . . . .
128
Standard gateway
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
,
119
Standard VoIP account
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
Static key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Stations for Internet radio
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Storage allocation
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
171
Storage capacity
displaying in Web configurator
. . . . .
171
STUN
refresh time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
STUN server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
111
Subnet mask
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
95
,
119
System log
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
System settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
date and time
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
158
security
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
T
TAP driver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Telephone PIN
changing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
Telephone settings
in display menu
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
in Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
Telephone system
operating in the network
. . . . . . . . . .
123
Telephony
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
132
Text editor
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
23
Time
setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
showing on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
86
Time server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
80
Time zone
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
setting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
showing on display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
85
TLS (Transport Layer Security)
. . . . . . . .
128
TLS-auth
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Tone scheme
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
139
Transfer key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
,
42
Troubleshooting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
172
e-mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
TUN driver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
U
Usage scenario
professional environment with phone
system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
without phone system
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
User interface
display
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
22
User mode
available functions
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
V
vCard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
50
Virtual driver
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
129
Virtual Private Network
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
VLAN (VIrtual Local Area Network)
. . . . . .
97
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network)
. . . .
121
VLAN priority
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
98
,
122
VLAN tagging
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
97
,
121
Voice mail
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
,
142
ending playback
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
62
in Message Centre
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
67
playing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
61
,
62
Voice quality
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
125
,
136
VoIP account
automatic configuration
. . . . . . . . . . .
109
configuration via provider profile
. . .
109
DTMF transfer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
112
entering registration data
. . . . . .
113
,
134
manual configuration
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
110
personal provider data
. . . . . . . .
113
,
134
selecting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
setting up
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
standard
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
31
VoIP status
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
170
Volume for ringer
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
81
alternative
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
82
Volume key
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
,
36
VPN
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
VPN (Virtual Private Network)
. . . . . . . .
128
VPN tunnel
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
128
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / HawkingSIX.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
208
Index
W
Weather
display as screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Weather report
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
74
Web address
in directory
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
53
Web configurator
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
accessing
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
changing password
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
159
login screen
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
menu structure
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
106
selecting language
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
settings
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
116
setup assistant
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
108
starting
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
105
Webcam
configuring for info service
. . . . . . . .
147
display as screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
displaying as info service
. . . . . . . . . . . .
75
Workgroup server
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
X
XML function
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
156
XML site
display as screensaver
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
specification.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
XML site as info service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
145
Gigaset Communications GmbH
Frankenstr. 2a, D-46395 Bocholt
Subject to availability.
www.gigaset.com
© Gigaset Communications GmbH 2012
All rights reserved. Rights of modifications reserved.
Gigaset DE700 IP PRO / en / A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619 / Cover_back.fm / 13.09.2012
PRO Version 3, 30.05.2012
A31008-M2211-R101-5-7619
5


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 1,8 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO Additional guide - English - 8 pages

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO Additional guide - German - 8 pages

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO Quick start guide - German - 6 pages

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO User Manual - German - 210 pages

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO Additional guide - Dutch - 8 pages

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO Quick start guide - Dutch - 6 pages

Gigaset Pro DE700 IP PRO User Manual - Dutch - 212 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info